Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 642

Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert

35010516 09/2020

Quantum using
EcoStruxure™ Control
Expert
Discrete and Analog I/O
Reference Manual
Original instructions

09/2020
35010516.17

www.schneider-electric.com
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical
characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein. This documentation is not
intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these
products for specific user applications. It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the
appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the
relevant specific application or use thereof. Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or
subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein. If you
have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication,
please notify us.
You agree not to reproduce, other than for your own personal, noncommercial use, all or part of
this document on any medium whatsoever without permission of Schneider Electric, given in
writing. You also agree not to establish any hypertext links to this document or its content.
Schneider Electric does not grant any right or license for the personal and noncommercial use of
the document or its content, except for a non-exclusive license to consult it on an "as is" basis, at
your own risk. All other rights are reserved.
All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and
using this product. For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance with documented system
data, only the manufacturer should perform repairs to components.
When devices are used for applications with technical safety requirements, the relevant
instructions must be followed.
Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may
result in injury, harm, or improper operating results.
Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage.
© 2020 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

2 35010516 09/2020
Table of Contents

Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Part I General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Chapter 1 Module Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Mapping a Local Quantum I/O Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Open the Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Chapter 2 Quantum Addressing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Flat Addressing—800 Series I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Topological Addressing—800 Series I/O Modules with Control Expert 29
IODDT Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Quantum IODDTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Addressing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Discrete I/O Bit Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
I/O Module Status Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
I/O Configuration for Discrete Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
I/O Configuration for Discrete Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
I/O Configuration for Discrete Input/Output Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Chapter 3 General Rules for Attaching Discrete and Analog
Input/Output Modules Terminal Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Attaching a Discrete and Analog Modules Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . 57
Part II Analog IN Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Chapter 4 140 ACI 030 00: Analog Current / Voltage IN Module . . 61
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

35010516 09/2020 3
Chapter 5 140 ACI 040 00: Analog Mixed Current IN Module . . . . . 73
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Chapter 6 140 ARI 030 10: Analog RTD IN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
EMC Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
140 ARI 030 10 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Chapter 7 140 ATI 030 00: Analog TC IN Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Chapter 8 140 AVI 030 00: Analog Mixed Current/Voltage IN
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Part III Analog OUT Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Chapter 9 140 ACO 020 00: Analog Current OUT Module . . . . . . . . 125
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

4 35010516 09/2020
Chapter 10 140 ACO 130 00: Analog Mixed Current OUT Module. . 135
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Chapter 11 140 AVO 020 00: Analog Mixed Voltage OUT Module. . 145
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Part IV Analog IN / OUT Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Chapter 12 140 AMM 090 00: Analog Mixed Current/Voltage IN /
OUT Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Part V Discrete IN Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Chapter 13 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Discrete I/O Logic Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Chapter 14 140 DDI 153 10: 5 VDC 4x8 Source IN Module . . . . . . . 177
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Chapter 15 140 DDI 353 00: 24 VDC 4x8 Sink IN Module . . . . . . . . 185
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

35010516 09/2020 5
Chapter 16 140 DDI 353 10: 24 VDC 4x8 Source IN Module . . . . . . . 193
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Chapter 17 140 DDI 364 00: 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast IN Module . . . . . 201
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Color Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Chapter 18 140 DDI 673 00: 125 VDC 3x8 Sink IN Module . . . . . . . . 211
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Chapter 19 140 DDI 841 00: 10 ... 60 VDC 8x2 Sink IN Module. . . . . 221
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Chapter 20 140 DDI 853 00: 10 ... 60 VDC 4x8 Sink IN Module. . . . . 229
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Chapter 21 140 DAI 340 00: 24 VAC 16x1 IN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

6 35010516 09/2020
Chapter 22 140 DAI 353 00: 24 VAC 4x8 IN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Chapter 23 140 DAI 440 00: 48 VAC 16x1 IN Module . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Chapter 24 140 DAI 453 00: 48 VAC 4x8 IN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Chapter 25 140 DAI 540 00: 115 VAC 16x1 IN Module . . . . . . . . . . 269
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Chapter 26 140 DAI 543 00: 115 VAC 2x8 IN Module . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Chapter 27 140 DAI 553 00: 115 VAC 4x8 IN Module . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

35010516 09/2020 7
Chapter 28 140 DAI 740 00: 230 VAC 16x1 IN Module . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Chapter 29 140 DAI 753 00: 230 VAC 4x8 IN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Chapter 30 140 DSI 353 00: 24 VDC 2x16 Supervised IN Module. . . 309
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Part VI Discrete OUT Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Chapter 31 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Discrete I/O Logic Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Chapter 32 140 DDO 153 10: 5 VDC 4x8 Sink OUT Module . . . . . . . 323
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
140 DDO 153 10 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Chapter 33 140 DDO 353 00: 24 VDC 4x8 Source OUT Module . . . . 333
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
140 DDO 353 00 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

8 35010516 09/2020
Chapter 34 140 DDO 353 01: 24 VDC 4x8 Source OUT Module . . . 343
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
140 DDO 353 01 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Chapter 35 140 DDO 353 10: 24 VDC 4x8 Sink OUT Module . . . . . 353
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
140 DDO 353 10 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Chapter 36 140 DDO 364 00: 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast OUT Module . 363
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
140 DDO 364 00 Cable Color Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
140 DDO 364 00 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Chapter 37 140 DDO 843 00: 10 ... 60 VDC 2x8 Source OUT Module 373
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
140 DDO 843 00 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Chapter 38 140 DDO 885 00: 24 ... 125 VDC 2x6 Source OUT
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
140 DDO 885 00 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

35010516 09/2020 9
Chapter 39 140 DAO 840 00: 24 ... 230 VAC 16x1 OUT Module . . . . 395
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
140 DAO 840 00 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Chapter 40 140 DAO 840 10: 24 ... 115 VAC 16x1 OUT Module . . . . 405
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
140 DAO 840 10 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Chapter 41 140 DAO 842 10: 100 ... 230 VAC 4x4 OUT Module . . . . 415
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
140 DAO 842 10 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Chapter 42 140 DAO 842 20: 24 ... 48 VAC 4x4 OUT Module . . . . . . 427
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
140 DAO 842 20 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Chapter 43 140 DAO 853 00: 230 VAC 4x8 Source OUT Module . . . 437
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
140 DAO 853 00 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

10 35010516 09/2020
Chapter 44 140 DRA 840 00: Relay 16x1 Normally Open OUT
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
140 DRA 840 00 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Chapter 45 140 DRC 830 00: Relay 8x1 Normally Open / Normally
Closed OUT Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
140 DRC 830 00 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Chapter 46 140 DVO 853 00: 10 ... 30 VDC 32x1 Verified OUT
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Part VII Discrete IN / OUT Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Chapter 47 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Discrete I/O Logic Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Chapter 48 140 DDM 390 00: 24 VDC 2x8 Sink IN / 2x4 Source OUT
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
RIO Drop Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
140 DDM 390 00 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

35010516 09/2020 11
Chapter 49 140 DDM 690 00: 125 VDC High Power IN/OUT Module 493
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
140 DDM 690 00 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Chapter 50 140 DAM 590 00: 115 VAC 2x8 IN / 2x4 OUT Module. . . 505
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
RIO Drop Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
140 DAM 590 00 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Part VIII Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog/Digital Modules . 519
Chapter 51 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Purpose and Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Wiring Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Chapter 52 140 AII 330 00: Safe Analog IN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Chapter 53 140 AII 330 10: Safe Analog IN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

12 35010516 09/2020
Chapter 54 140 AIO 330 00: Safe Analog OUT Module . . . . . . . . . . 559
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Chapter 55 140 DII 330 00: Safe Discrete IN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Chapter 56 140 DIO 330 00: Safe Discrete OUT Module . . . . . . . . . 581
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
140 DIO 330 00 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Part IX Quantum Safety I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Chapter 57 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
General Information on the Safety I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Safety I/O Modules Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Chapter 58 140 SAI 940 00S: Analog IN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Chapter 59 140 SDI 953 00S: Digital IN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622

35010516 09/2020 13
Chapter 60 140 SDO 953 00S: Digital OUT Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641

14 35010516 09/2020
Safety Information

Important Information

NOTICE
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device
before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain it. The following special messages may appear
throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention
to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

35010516 09/2020 15
PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified
personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of
the use of this material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation
of electrical equipment and its installation, and has received safety training to recognize and avoid
the hazards involved.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN


Do not use this product on machinery lacking effective point-of-operation guarding. Lack of
effective point-of-operation guarding on a machine can result in serious injury to the operator of
that machine.

WARNING
UNGUARDED EQUIPMENT
 Do not use this software and related automation equipment on equipment which does not have
point-of-operation protection.
 Do not reach into machinery during operation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

This automation equipment and related software is used to control a variety of industrial processes.
The type or model of automation equipment suitable for each application will vary depending on
factors such as the control function required, degree of protection required, production methods,
unusual conditions, government regulations, etc. In some applications, more than one processor
may be required, as when backup redundancy is needed.
Only you, the user, machine builder or system integrator can be aware of all the conditions and
factors present during setup, operation, and maintenance of the machine and, therefore, can
determine the automation equipment and the related safeties and interlocks which can be properly
used. When selecting automation and control equipment and related software for a particular
application, you should refer to the applicable local and national standards and regulations. The
National Safety Council's Accident Prevention Manual (nationally recognized in the United States
of America) also provides much useful information.
In some applications, such as packaging machinery, additional operator protection such as point-
of-operation guarding must be provided. This is necessary if the operator's hands and other parts
of the body are free to enter the pinch points or other hazardous areas and serious injury can occur.
Software products alone cannot protect an operator from injury. For this reason the software
cannot be substituted for or take the place of point-of-operation protection.
Ensure that appropriate safeties and mechanical/electrical interlocks related to point-of-operation
protection have been installed and are operational before placing the equipment into service. All
interlocks and safeties related to point-of-operation protection must be coordinated with the related
automation equipment and software programming.

16 35010516 09/2020
NOTE: Coordination of safeties and mechanical/electrical interlocks for point-of-operation
protection is outside the scope of the Function Block Library, System User Guide, or other
implementation referenced in this documentation.

START-UP AND TEST


Before using electrical control and automation equipment for regular operation after installation,
the system should be given a start-up test by qualified personnel to verify correct operation of the
equipment. It is important that arrangements for such a check be made and that enough time is
allowed to perform complete and satisfactory testing.

WARNING
EQUIPMENT OPERATION HAZARD
 Verify that all installation and set up procedures have been completed.
 Before operational tests are performed, remove all blocks or other temporary holding means
used for shipment from all component devices.
 Remove tools, meters, and debris from equipment.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Follow all start-up tests recommended in the equipment documentation. Store all equipment
documentation for future references.
Software testing must be done in both simulated and real environments.
Verify that the completed system is free from all short circuits and temporary grounds that are not
installed according to local regulations (according to the National Electrical Code in the U.S.A, for
instance). If high-potential voltage testing is necessary, follow recommendations in equipment
documentation to prevent accidental equipment damage.
Before energizing equipment:
 Remove tools, meters, and debris from equipment.
 Close the equipment enclosure door.
 Remove all temporary grounds from incoming power lines.
 Perform all start-up tests recommended by the manufacturer.

35010516 09/2020 17
OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENTS
The following precautions are from the NEMA Standards Publication ICS 7.1-1995 (English
version prevails):
 Regardless of the care exercised in the design and manufacture of equipment or in the selection
and ratings of components, there are hazards that can be encountered if such equipment is
improperly operated.
 It is sometimes possible to misadjust the equipment and thus produce unsatisfactory or unsafe
operation. Always use the manufacturer’s instructions as a guide for functional adjustments.
Personnel who have access to these adjustments should be familiar with the equipment
manufacturer’s instructions and the machinery used with the electrical equipment.
 Only those operational adjustments actually required by the operator should be accessible to
the operator. Access to other controls should be restricted to prevent unauthorized changes in
operating characteristics.

18 35010516 09/2020
About the Book

At a Glance

Document Scope
This documentation is a reference for the discrete and analog I/O hardware of the Quantum
automation system with EcoStruxure™ Control Expert.

Validity Note
This document is valid for EcoStruxure™ Control Expert 15.0 or later.

Related Documents

Title of documentation Reference number


EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Program Languages 35006144 (English), 35006145 (French),
and Structure, Reference Manual 35006146 (German), 35013361 (Italian),
35006147 (Spanish), 35013362 (Chinese)
Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, 35010529 (English), 35010530 (French),
Hardware Reference Manual 35010531 (German), 35013975 (Italian),
35010532 (Spanish), 35012184 (Chinese)

Product Related Information

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control
systems. Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program, install, alter, and apply
this product.
Follow all local and national safety codes and standards.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 19
20 35010516 09/2020
Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
General Information
35010516 09/2020

Part I
General Information

General Information

Introduction
This part provides general information on the discrete and analog I/O modules.

What Is in This Part?


This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
1 Module Configuration 23
2 Quantum Addressing Modes 27
3 General Rules for Attaching Discrete and Analog Input/Output Modules 57
Terminal Blocks

35010516 09/2020 21
General Information

22 35010516 09/2020
Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Module Configuration
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 1
Module Configuration

Module Configuration

Purpose
This chapter provides information on software configuration of the module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Mapping a Local Quantum I/O Station 24
Open the Parameter Configuration 26

35010516 09/2020 23
Module Configuration

Mapping a Local Quantum I/O Station

Overview
Use the following dialog to map an existing local Quantum I/O station with a new module.

Inserting a module (local)


This table shows the steps required for inserting a module in a local station.

Step Action
1 Call the Bus Editor
2 Mark a free slot in the local station (left mouse button)
3 Move the mouse pointer over the marked slot
4 Click on the right mouse button
Result: A shortcut menu is opened

5 Select New Device


Result: A dialog window opens that displays available modules

24 35010516 09/2020
Module Configuration

Step Action
6 Select the desired module from the respective category in the Hardware catalog.
Result: The new module is inserted in the empty slot on the local station.

35010516 09/2020 25
Module Configuration

Open the Parameter Configuration

Overview
The following dialog box enables you to call the parameter configuration for a module.
An explanation of the individual parameters can be found in the respective module chapters.

Open the Parameter Configuration


This table shows the steps required to open the parameter configuration.

Step Action
1 Call the Bus Editor
2 Select the module
3 Click on the right mouse button
Result: A shortcut menu is opened

4 Select Open Module


Result: The module opens with the parameter configuration window

26 35010516 09/2020
Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Addressing Modes
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 2
Quantum Addressing Modes

Quantum Addressing Modes

Purpose
This chapter provides information on the three different modes Control Expert allows to address
the I/O data from a Quantum I/O module:
 Flat Addressing
 Topological Addressing
 IODDT Addressing

NOTE: Topological addresses overlapping (%IWr.m.c) is not supported by Quantum application,


use flat addressing (%IWx) when memory overlapping control is needed.
NOTE: The different addressing modes refer to the same physical location in the PLC memory for
a given data point.
While Flat Addressing and Topological Addressing are available for all Quantum I/O modules,
IODDTs are only provided for modules that deliver information in addition to the I/O values (e.g.
errors or warnings).
Also provided is information about I/O module status bytes and bit order.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Flat Addressing—800 Series I/O Modules 28
Topological Addressing—800 Series I/O Modules with Control Expert 29
IODDT Addressing 30
Quantum IODDTs 31
Addressing Example 33
Discrete I/O Bit Numbering 34
I/O Module Status Byte 35
I/O Configuration for Discrete Input Modules 39
I/O Configuration for Discrete Output Modules 45
I/O Configuration for Discrete Input/Output Modules 52

35010516 09/2020 27
Addressing Modes

Flat Addressing—800 Series I/O Modules

Introduction
800 series I/O modules follow a system of flat address mapping in Control Expert. To work
properly. each module requires a determinate number of bits and/or words. The IEC addressing
system is equivalent to the 984LL register addressing. Use the following assignments:
 0x is now %Mx
 1x is now %Ix
 3x is now %IWx
 4x is now %MWx
The following table shows the relationship between 984LL notation and IEC notation.

Outputs and 984LL Notation IEC Notation


Inputs Register Addresses System Bits and Words Memory Addresses I/O Addresses
output 0x System Bit %Mx %Qx
input 1x System Bit %Ix %Ix
input 3x System Word %IWx %IWx
output 4x System Word %MWx %QWx

To access the I/O data of a module,

Step Action
1 Enter the address range in the configuration screen.

Examples
The following examples show the relationship between 984LL register addressing and IEC
addressing:
000001 is now %M1
100101 is now %I101
301024 is now %IW1024
400010 is now %MW10

28 35010516 09/2020
Addressing Modes

Topological Addressing—800 Series I/O Modules with Control Expert

Accessing I/O Data Values


Use topological addressing to access I/O data items. Identify the topological location of the module
within an 800 series I/O module with Control Expert using the following notation:
%<Exchangetype><Objecttype>[\b.e\]r.m.c[.rank]
where:
 b = bus
 e = equipment (drop)
 r = rack
 m = module slot
 c = channel
NOTE: When addressing,
1. The [\b.e\] defaults to \1.1\ in a local rack and does not need to be specified.
2. The rank is an index used to identify different properties of an object with the same data type
(value, warning level, error level).
3. The rank numbering is zero-based, and if the rank is zero, omit the entry.
For detailed information on I/O variables, please refer to the EcoStruxure™ Control Expert,
Program Languages and Structure, Reference Manual.

Reading Values: An Example

To read Action
input value (rank = 0) from channel 7 of an analog module Enter
located in slot 6 of a local rack: %IW1.6.7[.0]
input value (rank = 0) from channel 7 of an analog module Enter
located in slot 6 of drop 3 of RIO bus 2: %IW\2.3\1.6.7[.0]
’out of range’ value (rank = 1) from channel 7 of an analog Enter
module located in slot 6 of a local rack: %I1.6.7.1[.0]

35010516 09/2020 29
Addressing Modes

IODDT Addressing

IODDT Addressing
An IODDT allows all information (bits and registers) related to a channel to be handled through a
user-defined variable. This variable is defined in the Control Expert data editor by selecting the
appropriate IODDT for the module as a data type and specifying the topological address of the
module using the following syntax:
%CH[\b.e\]r.m.c
where:
 b = bus
 e = equipment (drop)
 r = rack
 m = module slot
 c = channel
Here is an example of an IODDT for a thermocouple input module in slot 4 of a local rack:

Variables in the User Program


You can access all information related to channel 1 of the module using the following variables:
 My_Temp_Point1.VALUE for the measured value
 My_Temp_Point1.ERROR indicating an out-of-range condition
 My_Temp_Point1.WARNING indicating an over-range condition

30 35010516 09/2020
Addressing Modes

Quantum IODDTs

Introduction
Control Expert provides a couple of IODDTs which are either generic and can be used for several
I/O modules or belong to one specific module.
NOTE: Deviating from the general description of the data types in the Direct Addressing Data
Instances chapter in the EcoStruxure™ Control Expert Reference Manual, in Quantum IODDTs for
analog modules and expert modules the data type Bool is used for %I and %Q.

T_ANA_IN_VE
T_ANA_IN_VE is used with all channels of the following I/O modules:
 ACI 030 00
 AII 330 10
 ACI 040 00
 ACI 040 00

IODDT for analog input modules supporting Value and Error

Object Symbol Rank Description


%IW VALUE 0 Input value
%I ERROR 1 Input error

T_ANA_IN_VWE
T_ANA_IN_VWE is used with all channels of the following I/O modules:
 ARI 030 10,
 AVI 030 00
 ATI 030 00
 AII 330 00
and
 Channels 3 and 4 of AMM 090 00

IODDT for analog input modules supporting Value, Warning and Error

Object Symbol Rank Description


%IW VALUE 0 Input value
%I ERROR 1 Input error
%I WARNING 2 Input warning

35010516 09/2020 31
Addressing Modes

T_ANA_BI_VWE
T_ANA_BI_VWE is used with the following I/O modules:
 Channels 1 and 2 of AMM 090 00
IODDT for bidirectional analog modules supporting Value, Warning and Error

Object Symbol Rank Description


%IW VALUE_IN 0 Input value
%QW VALUE_OUT 0 Output value
%I ERROR_IN 1 Input error
%I WARNING 2 Input warning
%I ERROR_OUT 3 Output error

T_CNT_105
T_CNT_105 is used with all channels of the following I/O modules:
 EHC 105
Specific IODDT for high speed counter module EHC 105

Object Symbol Rank Description


%IW VALUE_L 1 Input value: Low word
%IW VALUE_H 2 Input value: High word
%I ERROR 1 Error in Counter
%I SP_FINAL 2 Final Set Point signal
%I SP_FIRST 3 First Set Point signal
%I SP_SECOND 4 Second Set Point signal
%QW STOP_VALUE 1 For CNT_DIR="0", final set point value
%QW INITIAL_VALUE 2 For CNT_R="1", initial set point value
%Q LS 1 "1", Counter load/start (controlled by the rising
edge)
%Q RSTART 2 "1", Counter restart (controlled by the rising
edge)
%Q OUT_OFF 3 "1", Counter output switch-off
%Q CNT_DIR 4 "0" Counter counts up
"1" Counter counts down
%Q OM1 5 Operating Mode bit 1
%Q OM2 6 Operating Mode bit 2
%Q OM3 7 Operating Mode bit 3
%Q OM4 8 Operating Mode bit 4

32 35010516 09/2020
Addressing Modes

Addressing Example

Comparing the 3 Addressing Modes


The following example compares the 3 possible addressing modes. An 8-channel thermocouple
140 ATI 030 00 module with the following configuration data is used:
 mounted in slot 5 of the CPU rack (local rack)
 starting input address is 201 (input word %IW201)
 end input address is 210 (input word %IW210)
To access the I/O data from the module you can use the following syntax:

Module data Flat Topological IODDT Addressing Concept


Addressing Addressing Addressing
Channel 3 %IW203 %IW1.5.3 My_Temp.VALUE 300203
temperature
Channel 3 %IW209.5 %I1.5.3.1 My_Temp.ERROR 300209
out of range Bit 5 to be
extracted by user
logic
Channel 3 %IW209.13 %I1.5.3.2 My_Temp.WARNING 300209
range warning Bit 13 to be
extracted by user
logic
Module internal %IW210 %IW1.5.10 not accessible through 300210
temperature IODDT

NOTE: For the IODDT the data type T_ANA_IN_VWE is used and the variable My_Temp with the
address %CH1.5.10 was defined.
For comparison, the register addressing as used with Concept is added in the last column. As
Concept does not support direct addressing of a bit in a word, the bit extraction has to be performed
in the user program.

35010516 09/2020 33
Addressing Modes

Discrete I/O Bit Numbering

Introduction
The numbering of channels of an I/O module usually starts with 1 and counts up to the maximum
number of supported channels. The software however starts numbering with a 0 for the least
significant bit in a word (LSB). The Quantum I/O modules have their lowest channel mapped to the
most significant bit (MSB).
The following figure shows the mapping of I/O channels related to the bits in a word:.

Word Addressing Versus Bit Addressing


Mainly discrete I/O modules can be configured to deliver their I/O data either in word format or in
bit format. This can be selected during configuration by selecting either %IW (%MW) or %I (%M). If
you need to access a single bit from an I/O module configured to use an I/O word, you can use the
syntax %word.bit. The following table gives you the connection between I/O point number and
the associated I/O address in bit and word addressing.
The table shows a 32-point input module in the main rack, slot 4 configured with starting address
%I1 or %IW1:

I/O Bit address Bit address Bit address Bit address


channel (flat (topological extracted from word extracted from word
addressing) addressing) (flat addressing) (topological
addressing)
1 %I1 %I1.4.1[.0] %IW1.15 %IW1.4.1.1.15
2 %I2 %I1.4.2[.0] %IW1.14 %IW1.4.1.1.14
3 %I3 %I1.4.3[.0] %IW1.13 %IW1.4.1.1.13
•••
15 %I15 %I1.4.15[.0] %IW1.1 %IW1.4.1.1.1
16 %I16 %I1.4.16[.0] %IW1.0 %IW1.4.1.1.0
17 %I17 %I1.4.17[.0] %IW2.15 %IW1.4.1.2.15
18 %I18 %I1.4.18[.0] %IW2.14 %IW1.4.1.2.14
•••
31 %I31 %I1.4.31[.0] %IW2.1 %IW1.4.1.2.1
32 %I32 %I1.4.32[.0] %IW2.0 %IW1.4.1.2.0

34 35010516 09/2020
Addressing Modes

I/O Module Status Byte

Addressing Module Status Data


In addition to possible channel related diagnostics data, a module related status byte may be used.
The status information of all modules in a drop is administered by a table of %IW words. The starting
address of this table can be entered in the configuration screen for the drop.
This information is not accessible through topological addressing.
NOTE: The status information is only available if the module supports a status byte. For the
meaning of the status byte, check the module descriptions.
Example of a drop configuration screen with the starting address of the status table set to 100:

35010516 09/2020 35
Addressing Modes

The following illustration shows how one word of the table conveys the status information for two
modules:

36 35010516 09/2020
Addressing Modes

Example
The following example shows a rack and the corresponding I/O status bytes displayed in an
animation table. The drop is configured to start at word %IW100 and allocates 16 words. This
represents the local and expansion rack, and assumes they are 16 slot racks.
If a module does not have have a status byte associated with the module or the slot is empty, then
the byte = 0.
Rack configuration and animation table:

Relation between slot, input word and status byte. The byte related to the module is marked:

Slot Input Word Value Module Module


1 %IW[0] 0 power supply no status byte
2 0 CPU no status byte
3 %IW[1] 2#1000_0000_0000_0000 CPU no status byte
4 2#1000_0000_0000_0000 AVI At least one channel is not
operating correctly.
5 %IW[2] 2#0000_0000_0000_1111 ATI Channels 1 ... 4 are not
operating correctly.
6 2#0000_0000_0000_1111 140 CRP 93• 00 no status byte

35010516 09/2020 37
Addressing Modes

Slot Input Word Value Module Module


NOTE: If you install a 2#1101_1110_0000_0000 140 CRP 312 00 CRP status byte1
140 CRP 312 00 remote
I/O head module on the
local rack instead of a
140 CRP 93• 00
module, then:
7 %IW[3] 0 empty
8 0 empty
9 %IW[4] 2#0000_0000_0011_1111 DDO All channels are not
operating correctly.
10 2#0000_0000_0011_1111 XBE no status byte
•••

1 If you install a 140 CRP 312 00 remote I/O head module on the local rack instead of a
140 CRP 93• 00 module, the status byte is the ETH_STATUS detailed in the Device DDT Names
topic in the Quantum EIO Remote I/O Modules Installation and Configuration Guide.

38 35010516 09/2020
Addressing Modes

I/O Configuration for Discrete Input Modules

Overview
This section provides information on configuration of 8-, 16-, 24-, 32-, and 96-point input modules.

8-Point Input Modules


The 8-point input modules are:
 140 DII 330 00 (DC Input Intrinsically Safe)

Flat Addressing
The input modules listed above can be configured as either 8 contiguous %I references or as one
%IW word. For a description of how to access the input points, please refer to Discrete I/O Bit
Numbering, page 34.

Topological Addressing
The following tables show the topological addresses for the 8-Point Input Modules.
Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %I[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Input 2 %I[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Input 7 %I[\b.e\]r.m.7 Value
Input 8 %I[\b.e\]r.m.8 Value

Topological addresses in Word Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Inputword 1 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Value

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

I/O Map Status Byte


There is no I/O map status byte associated with these modules.

35010516 09/2020 39
Addressing Modes

16-Point Input Modules


The 16-point input modules are:
 140 DAI 340 00 (AC Input 24 Vac 16x1)
 140 DAI 440 00 (AC Input 48 Vac 16x1)
 140 DAI 540 00 (AC Input 115 Vac 16x1)
 140 DAI 543 00 (AC Input 115 Vac 8x2)
 140 DAI 740 00 (AC Input 230 Vac 16x1)
 140 DDI 841 00 (DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink)
 140 HLI 340 00 (DC Input 24 Vdc 16 Sink/Source)

Flat Addressing
The input modules listed above can be configured as either 16 contiguous %I references or as one
%IW word. For a description of how to access the input points, please refer to Discrete I/O Bit
Numbering, page 34.

Topological Addressing
The following tables show the topological addresses for the 16-Point Input Modules.
Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %I[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Input 2 %I[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Input 15 %I[\b.e\]r.m.15 Value
Input 16 %I[\b.e\]r.m.16 Value

Topological addresses in Word Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Inputword 1 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Value

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

I/O Map Status Byte


There is no I/O map status byte associated with these modules.

40 35010516 09/2020
Addressing Modes

24-Point Input Module


There is only one 24-point input module:
 140 DDI 673 00 (DC Input 125 VDC 3x8 Sink)

Flat Addressing
The input module listed above can be configured as either 24 contiguous discrete input %I
reference, or as 2 contiguous %IW input words in the following format. For a description of how to
access the input points, please refer to Discrete I/O Bit Numbering, page 34.

Topological Addressing
The following tables show the topological addresses for the 24-Point Input Modules.
Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %I[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Input 2 %I[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Input 23 %I[\b.e\]r.m.23 Value
Input 24 %I[\b.e\]r.m.24 Value

Topological addresses in Word Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Inputword 1 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Value
Inputword 2 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.2 Value

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

I/O Map Status Byte


There is no input I/O map status byte associated with this module.

35010516 09/2020 41
Addressing Modes

32-Point Input Modules


The 32-point input modules are as follows:
 140 DAI 353 00 (AC Input 24 Vac 4x8)
 140 DAI 453 00 (AC Input 48 Vac 4x8)
 140 DAI 553 00 (AC Input 115 Vac 4x8)
 140 DAI 753 00 (AC Input 230 Vac 4x8)
 140 DDI 153 10 (DC Input 5 V 4x8 Source)
 140 DDI 353 00 (DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink)
 140 DDI 353 10 (DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Source)
 140 DDI 853 00 (DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink)
For addressing information of the 140 DSI 353 00, please refer to Addressing, page 316.

Flat Addressing
The input modules listed above can be configured as either 32 contiguous discrete input %I
references or as two contiguous %IW input words in the following format. For a description of how
to access the input points, please refer to Discrete I/O Bit Numbering, page 34.

Topological Addressing
The following tables show the topological addresses for the 32-Point Input Modules.
Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %I[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Input 2 %I[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Input 31 %I[\b.e\]r.m.31 Value
Input 32 %I[\b.e\]r.m.32 Value

42 35010516 09/2020
Addressing Modes

Topological addresses in Word Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Inputword 1 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Value
Inputword 2 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.2 Value

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

I/O Map Status Byte


There is no I/O map status byte associated with these modules.

96-Point Input modules


The following is the only 96 point input module:
 140DDI36400 - DC input 6 x 16 sink

Flat Addressing
The following information pertains to the 140DDI36400 Input module. For a description of how to
access the input points, please refer to Discrete I/O Bit Numbering, page 34.

35010516 09/2020 43
Addressing Modes

Topological Addressing
The following tables show the topological addresses for the 96-Point Input Modules.
Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %I[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Input 2 %I[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Input 95 %I[\b.e\]r.m.95 Value
Input 96 %I[\b.e\]r.m.96 Value

Topological addresses in Word Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Inputword 1 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Value
Inputword 2 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.2 Value
Inputword 3 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.3 Value
Inputword 4 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.4 Value
Inputword 5 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.5 Value
Inputword 6 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.6 Value

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

I/O Map Status Byte


There is no I/O map status byte associated with this module.

44 35010516 09/2020
Addressing Modes

I/O Configuration for Discrete Output Modules

Overview
This section provides information on configuration of 8-, 12-, 16-, 32- and 96-point output modules.

8-Point Output Modules


The following shows the 8-point output module:
 140 DRC 830 00 (Relay Ouput 8x1 Normally Open/Normally Closed)
 140 DIO 330 00 (Safe Discrete OUT Module)

Flat Addressing
The ouput modules listed above can be configured as either eight contiguous discrete %M output
references or as one %MW output word. For a description of how to access the input points, please
refer to Discrete I/O Bit Numbering, page 34.

Topological Addressing
The following tables show the topological addresses for the 8-Point Output Modules.
Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Output 1 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Output 2 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Output 7 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.7 Value
Output 8 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.8 Value

Topological addresses in Word Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Outputword 1 %QW[\b.e\]R.S.1.1 Value

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

I/O Map Status Byte


There is no I/O Map status byte associated with these modules.

35010516 09/2020 45
Addressing Modes

12-Point Output Module


The 12-point output module is:
 140 DDO 885 00

Flat Addressing (Error Inputs)


The Error Inputs of the 140 DDO 885 00 can be configured as either 16 contiguous %I references
or as one %IW word. For a description of how to access the input points, please refer to Discrete
I/O Bit Numbering, page 34.

Topological Addressing
The following tables show the topological addresses for the 12-Point Error Inputs.
Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %I[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Input 2 %I[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Input 11 %I[\b.e\]r.m.11 Value
Input 12 %I[\b.e\]r.m.12 Value

Topological addresses in Word Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Inputword 1 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Value

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

Flat Addressing (Outputs)


The 140DDO88500 can be configured as one %MW output word in the following format. For a
description of how to access the input points, please refer to Discrete I/O Bit Numbering, page 34.

46 35010516 09/2020
Addressing Modes

Topological Addressing
The following tables show the topological addresses for the 12-Point Output Modules.
Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Output 1 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Output 2 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Output 11 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.11 Value
Output 12 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.12 Value

Topological addresses in Word Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Outputword 1 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Value

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

I/O Map Status Byte (Outputs)


The least significant bit in the output I/O map status byte is used as follows. For a description of
how to access the input points, please refer to Discrete I/O Bit Numbering, page 34.

16-Point Output Modules


The 16-point output modules are as follows:
 140DAO84000 (AC Output 24 ... 230 Vac 16x1)
 140DAO84010 (AC Output 24 ... 115 Vac 16x1)
 140DAO84210 (AC Output 100 ... 230 Vac 4x4)
 140DAO84220 (AC Output 48 Vac 4x4)
 140DDO84300 (DC Output 10 ... 60 VDC 2x8 Source)
 140DRA84000 (Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open)

35010516 09/2020 47
Addressing Modes

Flat Addressing
The output modules listed above can be configured as either 16 contiguous discrete %M output
references, or as one %MW output word in the following formats. For a description of how to access
the input points, please refer to Discrete I/O Bit Numbering, page 34.

Topological Addressing
The following tables show the topological addresses for the 16-Point Output Modules.
Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Output 1 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Output 2 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Output 15 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.15 Value
Output 16 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.16 Value

Topological addresses in Word Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Outputword 1 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Value

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

I/O Map Status Byte


The I/O map status byte is used by the 140DAO84210 and 140DAO84220 output modules. The
following figure shows I/O map status bytes use.

There is no I/O map status byte associated with the 140DAO84000, 140DAO84010,
140DDO84300, or 140DRA84000 module.

48 35010516 09/2020
Addressing Modes

32-Point Output Modules


The following list shows the 32-point output modules:
 140DAO85300 (AC Output 230 Vac 4x8 Sink)
 140DDO15310 (DC Output 5 V 4x8 Sink)
 140DDO35300 (DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source)
 140DDO35301 (DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source)
 140DDO35310 (DC Output 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Sink)
For addressing information of the 140DVO85300, please refer to Addressing, page 473.

Flat Addressing
The output modules listed above can be configured as either 32 contiguous %M references, or as
two %MW words in the following format. For a description of how to access the input points, please
refer to Discrete I/O Bit Numbering, page 34.

Topological Addressing
The following tables show the topological addresses for the 32-Point Output Modules.
Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Output 1 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Output 2 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Output 31 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.31 Value
Output 32 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.32 Value

Topological addresses in Word Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Outputword 1 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Value
Outputword 2 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1.2 Value

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

35010516 09/2020 49
Addressing Modes

I/O Map Status Byte


The I/O map status byte is used by the modules as follows:

96-Point Output Module


The 96 point output module is:
 140DDO36400 - DC out 24VDC 6x16 Source

Flat Addressing
The following figures show the words 1 through 6 format for the 140DDO36400 output module. For
a description of how to access the input points, please refer to Discrete I/O Bit Numbering,
page 34.

50 35010516 09/2020
Addressing Modes

Topological Addressing
The following tables show the topological addresses for the 16-Point Output Modules.
Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Output 1 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Output 2 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Output 95 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.95 Value
Output 96 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.96 Value

Topological addresses in Word Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Outputword 1 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Value
Outputword 2 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1.2 Value
Outputword 3 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1.3 Value
Outputword 4 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1.4 Value
Outputword 5 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1.5 Value
Outputword 6 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1.6 Value

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

I/O Map Status Byte


The I/O map status byte is used by the module as follows:

35010516 09/2020 51
Addressing Modes

I/O Configuration for Discrete Input/Output Modules

Overview
This section provides information on configuration of 4 In/4 Out and 16 In/8 Out modules.

4-Point Input/4-Point Output Module


The following shows the 4 In/4 Out module:
 140DDM69000 (125 Vdc Input/High Power Output)

Flat Addressing
The 140DDM69000 input/output module can be configured as either eight contiguous %I
references; or as one %IW word and either eight contiguous %M references or one %MW word.

CAUTION
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION - INCORRECT I/O MAPPING
When I/O mapping module inputs using discrete %I references in remote drops, do not split
discrete words between drops. The lowest discrete reference for a drop should start on a word
boundary.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

I/O Map Register (Inputs)


The following figure shows the %IW input word.

52 35010516 09/2020
Addressing Modes

I/O Map Assignment (Outputs)


The following figure shows the %MW output word.

In Fast Trip Mode, each output can be turned ON by the Command Bit (e.g., Output 1) or by the
corresponding Input Bit plus the Fast Trip Enable Bit (e.g., last order Input 1 controls Output 1
directly).

Topological Addressing
The following tables show the topological addressing for the 140 DDM 690 00 Input/Output
Module.
Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %I[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Input 2 %I[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Input 7 %I[\b.e\]r.m.7 Value
Input 8 %I[\b.e\]r.m.8 Value
Output 1 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Output 2 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Output 7 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.7 Value
Output 8 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.8 Value

Topological addresses in Word Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Inputword 1 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Value
Outputword 1 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Value

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.


35010516 09/2020 53
Addressing Modes

I/O Map Status Byte (Outputs)


The four least significant bits in the I/O map status are used as follows:

16-Point Input/8-Point Output Modules


The following information pertains to the 140 DAM 590 00 (AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 / AC Output 115
Vac 2x4) and the 140 DDM 390 00 (DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 / DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4) modules.
 140 DAM 590 00 (AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 / AC Output 115 Vac 2x4)
 140 DDM 390 00 (DC Input 24 Vdc 2X8 / DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4)

Flat Addressing
The modules listed above can be configured as either 16 contiguous %I references or as one %IW
word and as one %MW word.

I/O Map Register (Inputs)


The following figure shows the %IW input word. For a description of how to access the input points,
please refer to Discrete I/O Bit Numbering, page 34.

I/O Map Assignment (Outputs)


The modules listed above can be configured as 8 %M references or as 1 %MW output word in the
following format. For a description of how to access the input points, please refer to Discrete I/O
Bit Numbering, page 34.

54 35010516 09/2020
Addressing Modes

Topological Addressing
The following tables show the topological addresses for the 16/8-Point Input/Output Modules.
Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %I[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Input 2 %I[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Input 15 %I[\b.e\]r.m.15 Value
Input 16 %I[\b.e\]r.m.16 Value
Output 1 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Output 2 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Output 7 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.7 Value
Output 8 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.8 Value

Topological addresses in Word Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Inputword 1 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Value
Outputword 1 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Value

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

I/O Map Status Byte (Outputs)


The two least significant bits in the output I/O map status byte are used as follows.

35010516 09/2020 55
Addressing Modes

56 35010516 09/2020
Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Discrete and Analog Modules Terminal Blocks: General Rules for Installation
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 3
General Rules for Attaching Discrete and Analog Input/Output Modules Terminal Blocks

General Rules for Attaching Discrete and Analog Input/Output


Modules Terminal Blocks

Attaching a Discrete and Analog Modules Terminal Blocks

At a glance
Attaching a terminal block to a discrete/analog module is decribed below.

Discrete Modules

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before mounting/removing a discrete module,
 remove the power to the module (sensors and pre-actuators), and
 disconnect the terminal block.
 Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Analog Modules

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before mounting/removing an analog module,
 make sure that the terminal block is still connected to the ground, and
 remove the power to the module (sensors and pre-actuators).
 Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

35010516 09/2020 57
Discrete and Analog Modules Terminal Blocks: General Rules for Installation

Wiring Rules

58 35010516 09/2020
Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Analog IN Modules
35010516 09/2020

Part II
Analog IN Modules

Analog IN Modules

Introduction
The following part provides information on the Quantum Analog IN modules.

What Is in This Part?


This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
4 140 ACI 030 00: Analog Current / Voltage IN Module 61
5 140 ACI 040 00: Analog Mixed Current IN Module 73
6 140 ARI 030 10: Analog RTD IN Module 83
7 140 ATI 030 00: Analog TC IN Module 97
8 140 AVI 030 00: Analog Mixed Current/Voltage IN Module 111

35010516 09/2020 59
Analog IN Modules

60 35010516 09/2020
Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 ACI 030 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 4
140 ACI 030 00: Analog Current / Voltage IN Module

140 ACI 030 00: Analog Current / Voltage IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information of the Quantum 140 ACI 030 00 Module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 62
Indicators 63
Wiring Diagram 64
Specifications 67
Addressing 69
Parameter Configuration 71

35010516 09/2020 61
140 ACI 030 00

Presentation

Function
The Analog Input 8 Channel Unipolar module accepts mixed current and voltage inputs. Required
jumpers between the input and sense terminals for current input measuring are included with the
module.
NOTE: This module is HART compatible

Illustration
The following figure shows the140 ACI 030 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

62 35010516 09/2020
140 ACI 030 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 ACI 030 00 module.

Description
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 ACI 030 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red An error (external to the module) has been detected.

Diagnostic

1. Unused inputs may cause the activation of the F LED. To avoid this occurrence, please wire
unused channels in voltage mode to a channel that is in use.
2. This module produces an error signal F if any channel detects a broken wire condition in the 4-
20 mA range or a under voltage condition in the 1-5 V range.

35010516 09/2020 63
140 ACI 030 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration

CAUTION
UNWIRED INPUTS CAUSE INVALID READINGS
When configured for voltage inputs (no jumper installed between INPUT(+) and ISENSE
terminals), if a broken field wire occurs, readings will be non-zero and not predictable. The field
wiring terminal strip must not be removed when the module is operating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

64 35010516 09/2020
140 ACI 030 00

The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 ACI 030 00 module.

35010516 09/2020 65
140 ACI 030 00

External Wiring Recommendation


1. The user supplies the current and voltage sources (installation and calibration of fuses are at
the discretion of the user).
2. Use shielded signal cable. In noisy environnements, twisted shielded cable is recommanded.
3. Shielded cables should be connected to PLC’s ground.
4. A Shield Bar (STB XSP 3000 and STB XSP 3010/3020) should be used to connect the shielded
cable to ground (see Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Hardware, Reference
Manual).
5. The maximum channel to channel working voltage cannot exceed 30 Vdc.
6. N / C = Not connected.
NOTE: if polarity is reversed the analog values becomes zero nothing happens to channel. The
module is polarity sensitive and will read in one direction and not in the other direction but stay on
zero.
NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
(1.5 mm²) or 2-16 AWG (2 mm²); the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

66 35010516 09/2020
140 ACI 030 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 8 Channel IN Differential


External Power Not required
Bus Current required (Module) 240 mA
Power Dissipation 2W
I/O map 9 input words
Error Detection Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA mode) or under voltage
range (1 ... 5 V)

Voltage / Input
Voltage / Input

Operating Voltage (Channel to 30 VDC (max.)


Channel)
Absolute Voltage (max.) 50 VDC
Linear Mesuring Range 1 ... 5 VDC
Input Impedance > 20 Mohms

Current / Input
Current / Input

Absolute Current (max.) 25 mA


Linear Measuring Range 4 ... 20 mA
Input Impedance 250 Ohms
Internal conversion resistor
Maximum Overload Authorized for Protected for accidental: -19.2 - 30 VDC wiring
Inputs

35010516 09/2020 67
140 ACI 030 00

Resolution / Conversion
Resolution / Conversion

Resolution 12 bit
Absolute Accuracy Error @ 25 degrees C Typical: +/- 0.05% of full scale
(voltage mode) Maximum: +/- 0.1% of full scale
Linearity +/- 0.04%
Accuracy drift with temperature Typical: +/- 0.0025% of full scale / degrees C
Maximum: +/- 0.005% of full scale / degrees C
Common Mode Rejection < -72 dB @ 60 Hz
Input Filter Single pole low pass, -3 dB cutoff @ 15 Hz, +/- 20%
Update Time 5 ms for all channels

Isolation
Isolation

Channel to Bus 1000 VDC


3000 Vpp for 1 minute

NOTE: Calibration is not required for this module.

68 35010516 09/2020
140 ACI 030 00

Addressing

Flat Addressing
This module requires nine contiguous, 16-bit words-eight for input data and one for channel status.
The data words formats are as follows.

The following shows the word 9 register.

NOTE: Count stops at 4095.


NOTE: The undervoltage for this module is 0.5 - 0.7 V.
NOTE: The broken wire detect is set at 2.0 mA.

Topological Addressing
Topological addresses for the 140 ACI 030 00 Input Module:

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
%I[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Broken wire or under voltage
•••
Input 8 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.8 Value
%I[\b.e\]r.m.8.1 Broken wire or under voltage
Status Word %IW[\b.e\]r.m.9 Status of input channels

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

35010516 09/2020 69
140 ACI 030 00

IODDT
The 140 ACI 030 00 Input Module uses the T_ANA_IN_VE IODDT:

IODDT Name Object Data Type Name


T_ANA_IN_VE %CH[\b.e\]r.m.c ANA_IN_VWE userdefined
%IWr.m.c.0 Int .VALUE
%Ir.m.c.1 Bool .ERROR

Used abbreviations: r = rack, m = module slot, c = channel, b = bus, e = equipment (drop).


Bus and Drop default to 1 if not specified and can be left off.
NOTE: In Quantum IODDTs for analog modules and expert modules the data type Bool is used for
%I and %Q.

I/O Map Status Byte


The I/O map status byte is used by the 140 ACI 030 00 Input Module as follows.

70 35010516 09/2020
140 ACI 030 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping WORD (%IW-3X) -
Inputs Starting 1 -
Address
Inputs Ending 9 - includes a
Address Statusword
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other
in other than local) AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3

35010516 09/2020 71
140 ACI 030 00

72 35010516 09/2020
Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 ACI 040 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 5
140 ACI 040 00: Analog Mixed Current IN Module

140 ACI 040 00: Analog Mixed Current IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 ACI 040 00 Module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 74
Indicators 75
Wiring Diagram 76
Specifications 78
Addressing 80
Parameter Configuration 82

35010516 09/2020 73
140 ACI 040 00

Presentation

Function
The 140 ACI 040 00 is a 16 channel analog input module which accepts mixed current inputs.
NOTE: This module is HART compatible

Illustration
The following figure shows the140 ACI 040 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

74 35010516 09/2020
140 ACI 040 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 ACI 040 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 ACI 040 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red An error (external to the module) has been detected.

Diagnostics
1. Unused inputs may cause the activation of the F LED. To avoid this occurence, the unused
channels should be configured in the 0...25 ma range.
2. This module produces an error signal F if any channel detects a broken wire condition in the
4...20 mA range.

35010516 09/2020 75
140 ACI 040 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
Wiring diagram for the 140 ACI 040 00 Module.

76 35010516 09/2020
140 ACI 040 00

External Wiring Recommendations


1. The user supplies the current and voltage sources (installation and calibration of fuses are at
the discretion of the user).
2. Use shielded signal cable. In noisy environnements, twisted shielded cable is recommanded.
3. Shielded cables should be connected to the PLC’s ground.
4. A Shield Bar (STB XSP 3000 and STB XSP 3010/3020) should be used to connect the shielded
cable to ground (see Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Hardware, Reference
Manual).
5. The maximum channel to channel working voltage cannot exceed 30 Vdc.
6. N / C = Not connected.
NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 77
140 ACI 040 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 16 Channel IN (Differential or externally tied single ended)


External Power Not required
Operating Voltage (Channel to 30 VDC (max.)
Channel)
Bus Current required (Module) 360 mA
Power Dissipation 5W
I/O map 17 input words
Error Detection Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA mode)
Isolation (Field to Bus) 1780 VAC for 1 minute

Current / Input
Current / Input

Absolute Current (max.) 30 mA


Linear Measuring Range 0 ... 25 mA, 0 ... 25,000 counts
0 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 20,000 counts
4 ... 20 mA, 0 ...16,000 counts
4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 4,095 counts
Input Impedance 250 ohms nominal

78 35010516 09/2020
140 ACI 040 00

Resolution / Conversion
Resolution / Conversion

Resolution 0 ... 25,000 counts


0 ... 20,000 counts
0 ...16,000 counts
0 ... 4,095 counts
Absolute Accuracy Error @ 25 degrees C +/- 0.125% of full scale
Linearity (0 to 60 degrees C) +/- 12 microA max., 4 ... 20 mA
+/- 6 microA max., 0 ... 25 mA
+/- 6 microA max., 0 ... 20 mA
+/- 6 microA max., 4 ... 20 mA
Accuracy drift with temperature Typical: +/- 0.0025% of full scale / degrees C
Maximum: +/- 0.005% of full scale / degrees C
Common Mode Rejection < -90 dB @ 60 Hz
Input Filter Single pole low pass, -3 dB cutoff @ 34 Hz, +/- 25%
Update Time 15 ms for all channels

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

35010516 09/2020 79
140 ACI 040 00

Addressing

Flat Addressing
This module requires 17 contiguous, 16-bit words—16 for input data and one for channel status.
The data words formats are as follows.

The following shows the word 17.

NOTE: The broken wire detect is set at 2.0 mA.

80 35010516 09/2020
140 ACI 040 00

Topological Addressing
Topological addresses for the 140 ACI 040 00 Input Module:

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
%I[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Broken wire or under voltage
•••
Input 16 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.16 Value
%I[\b.e\]r.m.16.1 Broken wire or under voltage
Status Word %IW[\b.e\]r.m.17 Status of input channels

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

IODDT
The 140 ACI 040 00 Input Module uses the T_ANA_IN_VE IODDT:

IODDT Name Object Data Type Name


T_ANA_IN_VE %CH[\b.e\]r.m.c ANA_IN_VWE userdefined
%IWr.m.c.0 Int .VALUE
%Ir.m.c.1 Bool .ERROR

Used abbreviations: r = rack, m = module slot, c = channel, b = bus, e = equipment (drop).


Bus and Drop default to 1 if not specified and can be left off.
NOTE: In Quantum IODDTs for analog modules and expert modules the data type Bool is used for
%I and %Q.

I/O Map Status Byte


The I/O map status byte is used by the 140 ACI 040 00 Input Module as follows.

35010516 09/2020 81
140 ACI 040 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping WORD (%IW-3X) -
Inputs Starting Address 1 -
Inputs Ending Address 17 -
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module in other than AUX0 module in other
local) AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3
Channels
Channel1-Channel16 "4 ... 20 mA, 0-16000" "4 ... 20 mA, 0-4095"
"0 ... 20 mA, 0-20000
"0 ... 25 mA, 0-25000

82 35010516 09/2020
Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 ARI 030 10
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 6
140 ARI 030 10: Analog RTD IN Module

140 ARI 030 10: Analog RTD IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information of the Quantum 140 ARI 030 10 Module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 84
Indicators 85
Wiring Diagram 86
EMC Instructions 88
140 ARI 030 10 Specifications 90
Addressing 92
Parameter Configuration 95

35010516 09/2020 83
140 ARI 030 10

Presentation

Function
The Analog RTD Input 8 Channel module accepts input from up to eight 2-, 3-, and 4-wire RTD
sensors, and provides temperature measurement data to the Quantum CPU.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 ARI 030 10 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

84 35010516 09/2020
140 ARI 030 10

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 ARI 030 10 module.

Description
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 ARI 030 10 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red An error (external to the module) has been detected.
R Green Module has passed power up diagnostics
1 ... 8 Red There is a detected error on the indicated point or
channel.
This includes broken wire and short circuit conditions.

Diagnostic
1. When using 2-wire configurations, the temperature equivalent of twice the lead resistance of
one leg must be subtracted from the temperature reading

35010516 09/2020 85
140 ARI 030 10

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the wiring diagram of the 140 ARI 030 10.

86 35010516 09/2020
140 ARI 030 10

External Wiring Recommendation


The module is calibrated per:
IEC Publication 751 for platinum RTDs: 100Ω @ 0 degrees C, TCR (α) = 0.00385Ω/Ω/degrees C.
DIN 43760 for nickel RTDs
American Platinum RTDs: 100Ω @ 0 degrees C, TCR (α) = 0.00392Ω/Ω/degrees C
NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size is 1-14 AWG or 2-16 AWG; the
minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 87
140 ARI 030 10

EMC Instructions

Illustration
The following figure shows the wiring diagram of the 140 ARI 030 10 module in a high-interference
environment.

88 35010516 09/2020
140 ARI 030 10

Instruction Notes
 Use twisted-pair shielded cable in a high-interference environment.
 Ground the cable shield close to the module side.
 We recommend that you put the magnet ring close to the module side. When using twisted-pair
is difficult (especially for 3-wire), use the magnet ring.
Follow the pattern in the table for twisted-pair:

Step Mode Description


1 4-wire ISOURCE+ twisted with ISOURCE-
VSENSE+ twisted with VSENSE-
2 3-wire ISOURCE+/VSENSE+ twisted with ISOURCE-
VSENSE+ go alone
— or —
ISOURCE+/VSENSE+ twisted with VSENSE-
ISOURCE+ go alone
3 2-wire ISOURCE+/VSENSE+ twisted with ISOURCE-/VSENSE-

35010516 09/2020 89
140 ARI 030 10

140 ARI 030 10 Specifications

General Specifications

Module Type 8 Channel IN (RTD)


External Power Not required
Bus Current required (Module) 200 mA
Power Dissipation 1W
I/O map 9 input words
Input Impedance > 10 MΩ
Error Detection Out of range or 8 red LEDs to indicate broken wire
conditions.

RTD-Types / Range

IEC Platinum: -200 ... +850 degrees C


PT 100, PT 200, PT 500, PT 1000
American Platinum: -100 ... +450 degrees C
PT 100, PT 200, PT 500, PT 1000
Nickel: -60 ... +180 degrees C
N 100, N 200, N 500, N 1000

Measurement Current

PT 100, PT 200, N100, N200 2.5 mA


PT 500, PT 1000, N 500, N 1000 0.5 mA

Resolution / Conversion

Resolution 0.1 degree C


Absolute Accuracy Error +/- 0.5 degrees C (25 degrees C)
+/- 0.9 degrees C (0 ... 60 degrees C)
Linearity (0 to 60 degrees C) +/- 0.01% of full scale (0 ... 60 degrees C)

Isolation

Channel to Channel 300 Vpp


Channel to Bus 1780 VAC @ 47 ... 63 Hz for 1 minute
2500 VDC

90 35010516 09/2020
140 ARI 030 10

Update Time (all channels)

2-wire 640 ms
4-wire
3-wire 1.2 s

Overvoltage Protection

Maximum input voltage (destruction Differential voltage of 50 Vdc or 30 Vac


limits)

35010516 09/2020 91
140 ARI 030 10

Addressing

Flat Addressing
This module requires nine contiguous, 16-bit words—eight for input data and one for channel
status. The data word formats are as follows.

The following shows the word 9 register.

*A range warning is issued when a channel input exceeds the rated input value. An out-of-range
bit is set when a channel input exceeds the rated input value by 2.34% or when a broken wire is
sensed on the channel. The warning bit is cleared (if set) when the out-of-range bit is set.

92 35010516 09/2020
140 ARI 030 10

Topological Addressing
Topological addresses for the 140 ARI 030 10 Input Module:

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
%I[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Broken wire or Out of range
%I[\b.e\]r.m.1.2 Range warning
•••
Input 8 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.8 Value
%I[\b.e\]r.m.8.1 Broken wire or Out of range
%I[\b.e\]r.m.8.2 Range warning
Status Word %IW[\b.e\]r.m.9 Status of input channels

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

IODDT
The 140 ARI 030 10 Input Module uses the T_ANA_IN_VE IODDT:

IODDT Name Object Data Type Name


T_ANA_IN_VE %CH[\b.e\]r.m.c ANA_IN_VWE userdefined
%IWr.m.c.0 Int .VALUE
%Ir.m.c.1 Bool .ERROR
%Ir.m.c.2 Bool .WARNING

Used abbreviations: r = rack, m = module slot, c = channel, b = bus, e = equipment (drop).


Bus and Drop default to 1 if not specified and can be left off.
NOTE: In Quantum IODDTs for analog modules and expert modules the data type Bool is used for
%I and %Q.

35010516 09/2020 93
140 ARI 030 10

I/O Map Status Byte


The I/O map status byte is used by the 140 ARI 030 10 Input Module as follows.

94 35010516 09/2020
140 ARI 030 10

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping WORD (%IW-3X) -
Inputs Starting Address 1 -
Inputs Ending Address 9 -
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module in other than local) AUX0 module in other
AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3
Module_Configuration
Resolution 1.0 Deg 0.1 Deg
Output Unit Centigrade Fahrenheit
Value Type Temp Raw Value
Channels
Channel1

35010516 09/2020 95
140 ARI 030 10

Name Default Value Options Description


Disable No Yes
Wire 4 wire 2 wire
3 wire
Type "Pt 100, -200 to 850" "Pt 200, -200 to 850"
"Pt 500, -200 to 850"
"Pt 1000, -200 to 850"
"Ni 100, -200 to 850"
"Ni 200, -200 to 850"
"Ni 500, -200 to 850"
"Ni 1000, -200 to 850"
"R, 0 to 766,66 ohms"
"R, 0 to 4000 ohms"
"Apt 100, -100 to 450"
"Apt 200, -100 to 450"
"Apt 500, -100 to 450"
"Apt 1000, -100 to 450"
Channel2-Channel8 see Channel1

96 35010516 09/2020
Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 ATI 030 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 7
140 ATI 030 00: Analog TC IN Module

140 ATI 030 00: Analog TC IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 ATI 030 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 98
Indicators 99
Wiring Diagram 100
Specifications 103
Addressing 106
Parameter Configuration 109

35010516 09/2020 97
140 ATI 030 00

Presentation

Function
The140 ATI 030 00 is an 8-channel thermocouple input module.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 ATI 030 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

98 35010516 09/2020
140 ATI 030 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 ATI 030 00 module.

Description
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 ATI 030 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red An error (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 8 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.
1 ... 8 Red Indicated channel is out of range.
Broken wire condition is detected

Diagnostic
1. All TC ranges have an open TC detect and upscale output. This results in a reading of 7FFF
hexadecimal (32767 decimal) when an open TC is detected.

35010516 09/2020 99
140 ATI 030 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the wiring diagram of the 140 ATI 030 00.

100 35010516 09/2020


140 ATI 030 00

External Wiring Recommendation


1. Use shielded TCs. (The user should consider using shielded wire in a noisy environment.)
2. Shielded types should be connected to the PLC’s ground.
3. A Shield Bar (STB XSP 3000 and STB XSP 3010/3020) should be used to connect the shielded
cable to ground (see Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Hardware, Reference
Manual)
4. Connections marked Not Used are not electrically connected within the module. These points
are used as a thermal link to ambient air. They are not recommended as electrical tie points as
this could affect the accuracy of cold junction compensation.
5. The 140 CFA 040 00 CableFast block can be used. However it can create a temperature
variation up to 35.6 °F (2 °C). For more information, refer to the Modicon Quantum Automation
Series Hardware Reference Guide (840 USE 100).
NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 101


140 ATI 030 00

Using Cold Junction Compensation (CJC)


For temperature measurements, the 140 ATI 030 00 provides an internal CJC. However, a remote
CJC can be used with the following TC types: J,K and T. The TC must be connected to Channel 1.
NOTE:
Recomendation when using remote CJC:
 To obtain the best accuracy when using a remote CJC, connect it as close as possible from the
140 ATI 030 00 module.
 The distance between the external CJC and the module affects the temperature measurement
accuracy.
 The usage of CableFast with a remote CJC is not recommended.

The following diagram shows how to connect a remote Cold Junction Compensation using a
temperature compensation on the 140 ATI 030 00:

For more information on the 140 ATI 030 00 please refer to the Modicon Quantum Automation
Series Hardware Reference Guide (840 USE 100).

102 35010516 09/2020


140 ATI 030 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 8 Channel IN TC


External Power Not required
Operating Voltage (Channel to Channel) 220 VAC @ 47 ... 63 Hz or 300 VDC max.
Bus Current required (Module) 280 mA
Power Dissipation 1.5 W
I/O map 10 input words
Error Detection 8 red LEDs to indicate out of range or broken wire conditons

Range
Range

TC Types: Range (degrees C):


J -210 ... +760
K -270 ... +1370
E -270 ... +1000
T -270 ... +400
S -50 ... +1665
R -50 ... +1665
B +130 ... +1820
Millivolt Ranges -100 mV ... +100 mV
(Open circuit detect can be disabled on these ranges) -25 mV ... +25 mV

Resistance / Filter
Resistance / Filter

TC Resistance / Max. Source 200 ohms for rated accuracy


Resistance
Input Impedance > 1 Mohms
Input Filter Single low pass @ nominal 20 Hz plus notch filter at 50 / 60 Hz

35010516 09/2020 103


140 ATI 030 00

Noise Rejection / CJC


Noise Rejection / CJC

Normal Noise Rejection 120 dB min. @ 50 or 60 Hz


Cold Junction Compensation (CJC) Internal CJC operates 0 ... 60 degrees C (errors are included in the
accuracy specification). The connector door must be closed.
Remote CJC can be implemented by connecting a TC (which
monitors the external junction block temperature) to channel 1.
Types J, K, and T are recommended for remote CJC.

Resolution
Resolution

TC Ranges 1 degree C (default)


0.1 degree C
1 degree F
0.1 degree F
Millivolt Ranges 100 mV range , 3.05 μV (16 bit)
25 mV range , 0.76 μV (16 bit)

Absolute Accuracy, Update and Configuration Time

CAUTION
RISK OF TEMPORARY INVALID INITIAL INPUT TEMPERATURE VALUE.
Delay the temperature input processing by 2 seconds in the application:
 after the 140 ATI 030 00 health bit has changed from 0 to 1
 after a power cycle (warm restart) if the 140 ATI 030 00 is in the local rack
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION
RISK OF TEMPORARY INVALID INITIAL INPUT STATUS INFORMATION.
Delay the channel status information processing by 2 seconds in the application:
 after the 140 ATI 030 00 health bit has changed from 0 to 1
 after a power cycle (warm restart) if the 140 ATI 030 00 is in the local rack
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

104 35010516 09/2020


140 ATI 030 00

NOTE: The 140 ATI 030 00 temperature input processing hardware requires a relatively long time
to configure. This effect must be taken into account during special cases:
 When the PLC is in RUN mode and the module becomes power-cycled,
 When the PLC is in RUN mode and the module is hot swapped.

In these cases, the module becomes healthy before the input hardware initialization has
completed. During this time, invalid temperature values and status information could be received
from the module (see input words 1-10 and I/O map status byte).
Absolute accuracy, update and configuration time

TC Absolute Accuracy (see Note 1) Types J, K, E, T (see Note 2):


+/- 2 degrees C plus +/- 0.1% reading
Types S, R, B (see Note 3):
+/- 4 degrees C plus +/- 0.1% reading
Millivolt Absolute Accuracy @ 25 degrees C +/- 20 microV +/- 0.1% of reading
Accuracy Drift with Temperature 0.15 μV / degrees C + 0.0015% of reading /
degrees C max.
Update Time 1 s (all channels)
Configuration Time 2 s (all channels)

Isolation
Isolation

Channel to Bus 1780 VAC @ 47 ... 63 Hz or


2500 VDC for 1 minute

Notes on Specifications
 Absolute accuracy includes errors from the internal CJC, TC – curvature, offset plus gain, for
module temperature of 0 ... 60 degrees C. User supplied TC errors not included.
 For Type J and K, add 1.5 degrees C inaccuracy for temperatures below -100 degrees C.
 Type B cannot be used below 130 degrees C.

35010516 09/2020 105


140 ATI 030 00

Addressing

Flat Addressing
This module requires ten contiguous, 16-bit words—eight for input data, one for channel status,
and one for internal temperature of the module. The data words formats are as follows.

The following shows the word 9 register.

* A range warning is issued when a channel input exceeds the rated input value. An out-of-range
bit is set when a channel input exceeds the rated input value by 2.4% or when a broken wire is
sensed on the channel. The warning bit is cleared (if set) when the out-of-range bit is set.
The following figure shows the word 10 register.

106 35010516 09/2020


140 ATI 030 00

Topological Addressing
Topological addresses for the 140 ATI 030 00 Input Module:

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
%I[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Out of range
%I[\b.e\]r.m.1.2 Range warning
•••
Input 8 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.8 Value
%I[\b.e\]r.m.8.1 Out of range
%I[\b.e\]r.m.8.2 Range warning
Status Word %IW[\b.e\]r.m.9 Status of input channels
Internal Temperature %IW[\b.e\]r.m.10 Internal module temperature

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

IODDT
The 140ATI03000 Input Module uses the T_ANA_IN_VWE IODDT:

IODDT Name Object Data Type Name


T_ANA_IN_VWE %CH[\b.e\]r.m.c ANA_IN_VWE userdefined
%IWr.m.c.0 Int .VALUE
%Ir.m.c.1 Bool .ERROR
%Ir.m.c.2 Bool .WARNING

Used abbreviations: r = rack, m = module slot, c = channel, b = bus, e = equipment (drop).


Bus and Drop default to 1 if not specified and can be left off.
NOTE: In Quantum IODDTs for analog modules and expert modules the data type Bool is used for
%I and %Q.

35010516 09/2020 107


140 ATI 030 00

I/O Map Status Byte


The I/O map status byte is used by the 140 ATI 030 00 Input Module as follows.

108 35010516 09/2020


140 ATI 030 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping WORD (%IW-3X) -
Inputs Starting Address 1 -
Inputs Ending Address 10 -
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module in other than AUX0 module in other than
local) AUX1 local
AUX2
AUX3
Module_Configuration
Resolution 1.0 Deg 0.1 Deg
Output Unit Centigrade Fahrenheit
Cold Junction Compensator On Board Channel 1
Channels

35010516 09/2020 109


140 ATI 030 00

Name Default Value Options Description


Channel1 DISABLE ENABLE
Open Circuit Test No Yes
Raw Output Amplifier Gain 25 100
Type "J, Gain=25" "K, Gain=25"
"E, Gain=25"
"T, Gain=100"
"S, Gain=100"
"R, Gain=100"
Channel2-Channel8 see Channel1

110 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 AVI 030 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 8
140 AVI 030 00: Analog Mixed Current/Voltage IN Module

140 AVI 030 00: Analog Mixed Current/Voltage IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 AVI 030 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 112
Indicators 113
Wiring Diagram 114
Specifications 117
Addressing 120
Parameter Configuration 122

35010516 09/2020 111


140 AVI 030 00

Presentation

Function
The Analog In 8 Channel Bipolar module accepts a mix of current and voltage inputs. Jumpers are
required between the input and sense terminals for current inputs.
NOTE: This module is not HART compatible

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 AVI 030 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

112 35010516 09/2020


140 AVI 030 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 AVI 030 00 module.

Description
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 AVI 030 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red An error (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 8 Red Indicated channel is out of range (1 ... 5 V)
Broken wire condition is detected (4 ... 20 mA)

Diagnostic
1. To prevent improper fault indications, unused inputs should have the + (plus) and – (minus)
inputs tied together and be configured for a bipolar input range.

35010516 09/2020 113


140 AVI 030 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration

CAUTION
UNWIRED INPUTS CAUSE INVALID READINGS
When configured for voltage inputs (no jumper installed between INPUT(+) and ISENSE
terminals), if a broken field wire occurs, readings will be non-zero and not predictable. The field
wiring terminal strip must not be removed when the module is operating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

114 35010516 09/2020


140 AVI 030 00

The following figure shows the 140 AVI 030 00 wiring diagram.

35010516 09/2020 115


140 AVI 030 00

External Wiring Recommendation

1. The user supplies the current and voltage sources (installation and calibration of fuses are at
the discretion of the user).
2. Use shielded signal cable. In noisy environnements, twisted shielded cable is recommended.
3. Shielded cables should be connected to the PLC’s ground.
4. A Shield Bar (STB XSP 3000 and STB XSP 3010/3020) should be used to connect the shielded
cable to ground (see Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Hardware, Reference
Manual).
5. N / C = Not connected.
NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

116 35010516 09/2020


140 AVI 030 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 8 Channel IN Differential


External Power Not required
Operating Voltage (Channel to 200 VDC
Channel) 135 VAC rms max.
Bus Current required (Module) 280 mA
Power Disssipation 2.2 W
I/O map 9 input words
Error Detection Broken wire in 4 ... 20 mA mode, Out of range

Operating Ranges
Operating Ranges

Bipolar +/- 10 VDC


+/- 5 VDC
+/- 20 mA
Unipolar 0 ...10 VDC
0 ... 5 VDC
0 ... 20 mA
Unipolar with Offset 1 ... 5 VDC
4 ... 20 mA

NOTE: The Operating Ranges are selectable on a per-channel base.

Voltage / Input
Voltage / Input

Absolute Voltage (max.) 50 VDC


Linear Mesuring Range (Input range) x 1.024
Input Impedance > 20 Mohms

35010516 09/2020 117


140 AVI 030 00

Current / Input
Current / Input

Absolute Current (max.) 25 mA


Linear Measuring Range Input range) x 1.024
Input Impedance 250 ohms +/- 0.01%

Resolution / Conversion
Resolution / Conversion

16 bit +/- 10 VDC, 0 ...10 VDC


15 bit +/- 5 VDC, 0 ...5 VDC, +/- 20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA
14 bit 1 ... 5 VDC; 4 ... 20 mA
Accuracy Error @ 25 degrees C Voltage Mode:
Typical: +/- 0.03% of full scale (+-10V, 0..10V)
Maximum: +/- 0.05% of full scale (+-10V, 0..10V)
Current Mode:
Add an extra +/- 0.03%
Accuracy Drift with Temperature Typical: +/- 0.0015% of full scale / degrees C
Maximum: +/- 0.004% of full scale / degrees C
Linearity +/- 0.008%
Common Mode Rejection > -80 dB @ 60 Hz
Input Filter Single pole low pass, -3 dB @ 847 Hz, +/- 20%
Update Time 10 ms for all channels

Accuracy Error @ 25 degrees C:

Input range Typical (Absolute error) Maximum (Absolute Error)


+/- 10 VDC, +/- 5 VDC +/- 6 mV +/- 10 mV
0...10 VDC, 0...5 VDC, 1...15VDC +/- 3 mV +/- 5 mV
+/- 20 mA +/- 48 µA +/- 64 µA
0...20 mA, 4...20 mA +/- 24 µA +/- 32 µA

Isolation
Isolation

Channel to Bus 500 VAC rms for 1 minute


750 VDC rms for 1 minute

NOTE: Calibration is not required for this module.

118 35010516 09/2020


140 AVI 030 00

Linear Measuring Ranges Table


The following table shows the linear measuring ranges for the 140 AVI 030 00 Analog Input
Module.

Data Format Input Under Normal Over Range


Range
16-bit Format +/- 10 V < 768 768 ... 64768 > 64768
+/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA < 16768 16768 ... 48768 > 48768
0 ... 10 V 0 ... 64000 > 64000
0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 32000 > 32000
1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA <6400 6400 ... 32000 > 32000
Voltmeter* +/- 10 V < -10000 -10000 ... 10000 > 10000
Format
+/-5 V < -5000 -5000 ... 5000 > 5000
0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10000 > 10000
0 ... 5 V 0 ... 5000 > 5000
1 ... 5 V < 1000 1000 ... 5000 > 5000
+/- 20 mA < 1000 -20000 ... 20000 > 20000
0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20000 > 20000
4 ... 20 mA < 4000 4000 ... 20000 > 20000
12-bit Format +/- 10 V 0 0 ... 4095 4095
+/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA 0 0 ... 4095 4095
0 ... 10 V 0 ... 4095 4095
0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 4095 4095
1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA 0 0 ... 4095 4095

* The Voltmeter ranges are listed in Modsoft signed format.

35010516 09/2020 119


140 AVI 030 00

Addressing

Flat Addressing
This module requires nine contiguous, 16-bit words—eight for input data and one for channel
status. The data words formats are as follows.

The following shows the word 9 register.

*A range warning is issued when a channel input exceeds the rated input value. Warning bit stay
on after out of range bits are set.
**An out-of-range bit is set when a channel input exceeds the rated input value by 2.4% or when a
broken wire (4 ... 20 mA or 1 ... 5 V mode) is sensed on the channel. Out of range bits are also set
if inputs drop below 0.5 V (1 ... 5 V mode) or 2.08 mA (4 ...20 mA mode).

120 35010516 09/2020


140 AVI 030 00

Topological Addressing
Topological addresses for the 140 AVI 030 00 Input Module:

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
%I[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Out of range
%I[\b.e\]r.m.1.2 Range warning
•••
Input 8 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.8 Value
%I[\b.e\]r.m.8.1 Out of range
%I[\b.e\]r.m.8.2 Range warning
Status Word %IW[\b.e\]r.m.9 Status of input channels

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

IODDT
The 140AVI03000 Input Module uses the T_ANA_IN_VWE IODDT:

IODDT Name Object Data Type Name


T_ANA_IN_VWE %CH[\b.e\]r.m.c ANA_IN_VWE userdefined
%IWr.m.c.0 Int .VALUE
%Ir.m.c.1 Bool .ERROR
%Ir.m.c.2 Bool .WARNING

Used abbreviations: r = rack, m = module slot, c = channel, b = bus, e = equipment (drop).


Bus and Drop default to 1 if not specified and can be left off.
NOTE: In Quantum IODDTs for analog modules and expert modules the data type Bool is used for
%I and %Q.

I/O Map Status Byte


The I/O map status byte is used by the 140 AVI 030 00 Input Module as follows.

35010516 09/2020 121


140 AVI 030 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping WORD (%IW-3X) -
Inputs Starting Address 1 -
Inputs Ending Address 9 -
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module in other AUX0 module in other than
than local) AUX1 local
AUX2
AUX3
Data Format 16 bit format Volt Meter
12 bit format
Channels
Channel1 -10 TO +10V -10V TO +10V
0V TO +10V
-5V TO +5V
0V TO +5V
+1V TO +5V
-20 mA TO +20mA
Channel2-Channel8 see Channel1

122 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Analog OUT Modules
35010516 09/2020

Part III
Analog OUT Modules

Analog OUT Modules

Introduction
The following part provides information on the Quantum Analog OUT modules.

What Is in This Part?


This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
9 140 ACO 020 00: Analog Current OUT Module 125
10 140 ACO 130 00: Analog Mixed Current OUT Module 135
11 140 AVO 020 00: Analog Mixed Voltage OUT Module 145

35010516 09/2020 123


Analog OUT Modules

124 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 ACO 020 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 9
140 ACO 020 00: Analog Current OUT Module

140 ACO 020 00: Analog Current OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 ACO 020 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 126
Indicators 127
Wiring Diagram 128
Specifications 130
Addressing 132
Parameter Configuration 133

35010516 09/2020 125


140 ACO 020 00

Presentation

Function
The Analog Output 4 Channel Current module controls and monitors current in 4 ... 20 mA loops.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 ACO 020 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

126 35010516 09/2020


140 ACO 020 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 ACO 020 00 module.

Description
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 ACO 020 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red An error (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 4 Green Module outputs switched ON.
1 ... 4 Red Broken wire on indicated channels.

NOTE: When the green channel status LEDs are OFF, the loop current is 0 mA .

Diagnostic
1. At power up, the channel outputs are all disabled (current = 0). Configuring any channel as
disabled will cause all channels to be disabled when a communication loss occurs.

35010516 09/2020 127


140 ACO 020 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Before removing the connector, remove the field power or ensure that the pre-actuator wiring can
remain in an open circuit condition.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 ACO 020 00 module.

128 35010516 09/2020


140 ACO 020 00

External Wiring Recommendation


1. The user supplies the current and voltage sources (installation and calibration of fuses are at
the discretion of the user).
2. Use shielded signal cable. In noisy environnements, twisted shielded cable is recommended.
3. Shielded cables should be connected to the PLC’s ground.
4. A Shield Bar (STB XSP 3000 and STB XSP 3010/3020) should be used to connect the shielded
cable to ground (see Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Hardware, Reference
Manual).
5. Unused channels indicate broken wire status unless wired to the loop supply, as shown on
Channel 4. In this example, loop supply must be 30 V or less
6. The wiring example shows Channel 1 acting as a current sink and Channel 2 acting as a current
source for their respective field devices.
7. N / C = Not Connected.
NOTE: VM is an optional voltmeter that can be connected to read voltage that is proportional to the
current. Wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 meter maximum.
NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 129


140 ACO 020 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 4 Channel OUT


External Power Loop Voltage:12 ... 30 VDC, up to 60 VDC with an
external loop resistor
Bus Current required (Module) 480 mA
Power Dissipation 5.3 W max.
I/O map 4 output words
Error Detection Open circuit in 4 ... 20 mA mode. Specific channel is
identified when an open circuit is detected through
the red channel LED.

Voltage
Voltage

Loop Voltage 12 ... 30 VDC, up to 60 VDC with an external loop


resistor
Loop Resistance *=( - 30 VDC) / 0.02 A

=( - 7 VDC) / 0.02 A

* No is required for loop voltage less than


30 VDC
Internal Voltage Drop 7 VDC min., 30 VDC max. @ 20 mA

Resolution / Conversion
Resolution

Resolution 12 bit
Accuracy Error at 25 degrees C +/- 0.20% of full scale
Accuracy Drift with Temperature Typical: 0.004% of full scale / degrees C.
Maximum: 0.007% of full scale / degrees C.
Linearity +/- 1 LSB
Update Time 3 ms for all Channels (simultaneous update)
Settling time 900 μs to +/- 0.1 % of final value

130 35010516 09/2020


140 ACO 020 00

Isolation
Isolation

Channel to Bus 1780 VAC @ 47 ... 63 Hz or


2500 VDC for 1 minute
Channel to Channel 500 VAC @ 47 ... 63 Hz or
750 VDC for 1 minute

Fuses
Fuses

Internal Not required


External -

NOTE: When the green channel status LEDs are off, the loop current is 0 mA.

Voltmeter Monitor Specifications Table


The following table shows the voltmeter monitor specifications.

Range 1 ... 5 V (Main current loop must be active)


Scaling (Volts) = (mA) x 0.25

Output Impedance 300 ohms Typical


Wiring Length 1 m max.

35010516 09/2020 131


140 ACO 020 00

Addressing

Flat Addressing
This module requires four contiguous, 16-bit words (%MW) for output data. The data words formats
are as follows.

Topological Addressing
Topological addresses for the 140 ACO 020 00 Output Module:

Point I/O Object Comment


Output 1 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Output 2 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
Output 3 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.3 Value
Output 4 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.4 Value

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

I/O Map Status Byte


The I/O map status byte is used by the 140 ACO 020 00 Output Module as follows.

132 35010516 09/2020


140 ACO 020 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping WORD (%MW-4X) -
Outputs Starting 1 -
Address
Outputs Ending 4 -
Address
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if module in
(Grayed if module in AUX0 other than local
other than local) AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
Channels
ENABLE/DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE all channels in case
ALL CHANNELS... of system crash or timeout
Channel1 HOLD LAST VALUE DISABLE DISABLE option is displayed
USER DEFINED but not available.
Timeout Value 0 0-4095 only enabled if Channel =
USER DEFINED
Channel2-Channel4 see Channel1

35010516 09/2020 133


140 ACO 020 00

134 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 ACO 130 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 10
140 ACO 130 00: Analog Mixed Current OUT Module

140 ACO 130 00: Analog Mixed Current OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 ACO 130 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 136
Indicators 137
Wiring Diagram 138
Specifications 140
Addressing 142
Parameter Configuration 143

35010516 09/2020 135


140 ACO 130 00

Presentation

Function
The 140 ACO 130 00 is an 8 channel analog output module used to control and monitor current in
4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA, and 0 ... 25 mA loops.
NOTE: This module is not HART compatible.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 ACO 130 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

136 35010516 09/2020


140 ACO 130 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 ACO 130 00 module.

Description
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 ACO 130 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red An error (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 8 Green Module outputs switched ON.
1 ... 8 Red Broken wire on indicated channels.

Diagnostic
1. Unused outputs may cause the activation of the F (fault) LED. To avoid this occurrence the
unused channels should be configured in the 0 ... 25 mA range.
2. At power up, channel outputs are all at zero current (0 mA).

35010516 09/2020 137


140 ACO 130 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the wiring diagram of the 140 ACO 130 00 module:

138 35010516 09/2020


140 ACO 130 00

External Wiring Recommendation


1. The user supplies the current and voltage sources (installation and calibration of fuses are at
the discretion of the user).
2. Use shielded signal cable. In noisy environnements, twisted shielded cable is recommended.
3. Shielded cables should be connected to the PLC’s ground.
4. A Shield Bar (STB XSP 3000 and STB XSP 3010/3020) should be used to connect the shielded
cable to ground (see Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Hardware, Reference
Manual).
5. All terminals labeled ‘RETURN" are common inside the module.
6. N / C = Not connected.
NOTE: VM is an optional voltmeter that can be connected to read voltage that is proportional to the
current. Wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 meter maximum.
NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 139


140 ACO 130 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 8 Channel OUT


External Power Loop Voltage: 6 ... 30 VDC max.
Bus Current required (Module) 550 mA
Power Dissipation 5.0 W max.
I/O map 8 output words
Error Detection Open circuit in 4 ... 20 mA mode. The open channel
is indicated through the red channel LED and is also
reported back to the controller in the I/O Map status
byte

Voltage
Voltage

Loop Voltage 6 ... 30 VDC max.


Internal Voltage Drop 6 VDC min., 30 VDC max. @ 25 mA

Range / Resolution
Range / Resolution

0 ... 25 mA 0 ... 25,000 counts


0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20,000 counts
4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 16,000 counts
4 ... 25 mA 0 ... 4,095 counts

Accuracy
Accuracy

Accuracy Error @ 25 degrees C +/- 0.20% of full scale


Accuracy Drift with Temperature Typical: 0.004% of full scale / degrees C.
Maximum: 0.007% of full scale / degrees C.

140 35010516 09/2020


140 ACO 130 00

Linearity
Linearity

0 ... 25 mA +/- 4 μA
0 ... 20 mA
4 ... 20 mA
4 ... 25 mA +/- 12 μA

Times
Times

Update Time 5 ms for all Channels


Settling Time Full Scale 1.6 ms to 5% of the final value
Step Change 3.2 ms to 5% of the final value

Isolation
Isolation

Field to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute


Channel to Channel None

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External None

35010516 09/2020 141


140 ACO 130 00

Addressing

Flat Addressing
This module requires eight contiguous, 16-bit words (%MW) for output data. The data words formats
are as follows.

Topological Addressing
Topological addresses for the 140 ACO 130 00 Output Module:

Point I/O Object Comment


Output 1 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Output 2 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Output 7 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.7 Value
Output 8 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.8 Value

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

I/O Map Status Byte


The I/O map status byte is used by the 140 ACO 130 00 Output Module as follows.

142 35010516 09/2020


140 ACO 130 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping WORD (%MW-4X) -
Outputs Starting 1 -
Address
Outputs Ending 8 -
Address
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if module in
(Grayed if module in AUX0 other than local
other than local) AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
Channels
Channel_1

35010516 09/2020 143


140 ACO 130 00

Name Default Value Options Description


Range Selection "4-20 mA, 0-16000" "4-20 mA, 0-4095"
"0-20 mA, 0-20000"
"0-25 mA, 0-25000"
Timeout State HOLD LAST VALUE MINIMUM OUTPUT
USER DEFINED
Timeout Value 0 0-32767 only enabled if Timeout State
= USER DEFINED
Channel_2 - see Channel1
Channel_8

144 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 AVO 020 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 11
140 AVO 020 00: Analog Mixed Voltage OUT Module

140 AVO 020 00: Analog Mixed Voltage OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 AVO 020 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 146
Indicators 147
Wiring Diagram 148
Specifications 151
Addressing 153
Parameter Configuration 154

35010516 09/2020 145


140 AVO 020 00

Presentation

Function
The Analog Out 4 Channel module accepts outputs voltages in mixed modes and levels. These
are selected using jumpers on the field-wiring connector.
NOTE: This module is not HART compatible.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 AVO 020 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

146 35010516 09/2020


140 AVO 020 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 AVO 020 00 module.

Diagnostic
During normal operation, the front panel Active and 1 ... 4 green LEDs are ON. If bus
communication to the module stops for any reason, the Active LED will go off and output values
are set depending on panel software configuration.
 When LEDs 1 ... 4 are ON, the channel output levels will be as predetermined and held by the
module.
 When LEDs 1 ... 4 are OFF, the master override levels are output on each channel.

35010516 09/2020 147


140 AVO 020 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Before removing the connector, remove the field power or ensure that pre-actuator wiring can
remain in an open circuit condition.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Avoid erroneous outputs in this module by connecting the master override to an external source
through a 1/16 amp in-line fuse or connecting to circuit common.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

148 35010516 09/2020


140 AVO 020 00

The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 AVO 020 00 module.

COMMON 1 (-) OUTPUT 1 (+) FIELD


2 1
DEVICE
COMMON 1 (-) R1
4 3
CHANNEL 1
N/C 6 5 CONTROL 1 JUMPERED
FOR + / - 10 V
Jumper
MASTER OVERRIDE
8 7
REFERENCE 1 N/C = Not Connected
See
NOTE 1 COMMON 1 (-) 10 9 N/C

COMMON 2 (-) OUTPUT 2 (+)


12 11
Jumper CHANNEL 2
COMMON 2 (-) R2 JUMPERED
14 13 FOR 0 TO 5 V
Jumper Normally Open when Typical one
N/C 16 15 CH X green LED is ON of four
CONTROL 2
MASTER OVERRIDE REFERENCE 2 Normally
18 17
See Open
NOTE 1 COMMON 2 (-) 20 19 N/C
Channel
COMMON 3 (-) Output X
22 21 OUTPUT 3 (+) Normally
Jumper Closed
COMMON 3 (-)
24 23 R 3 CHANNEL 3 Master
JUMPERED Override X
CONTROL 3
N/C 26 25 FOR + / - 5 V
Jumper
MASTER OVERRIDE
28 27 REFERENCE 3
See Master Override Relay Circuit (Internal)
NOTE 1 COMMON 3 (-)
30 29 N/C
COMMON 4 (-) OUTPUT 4 (+)
32 31
CHANNEL 4
Jumper
COMMON 4 (-) JUMPERED
34 33
R4 FOR 0 TO 10 V
See + FIELD
N/C 36 35 CONTROL 4
NOTE 1 DEVICE
-
MASTER OVERRIDE
38 37 REFERENCE 4
COMMON 4 (-)
40 39 N/C

1/16A

+ -
EXTERNAL The external voltage source
VOLTAGE is not required for standard
SOURCE operation (NOTE 1 : see External Wiring Recommendation).

35010516 09/2020 149


140 AVO 020 00

External Wiring Recommendation


1. When the green channel status LEDs are off, the module is not generating outputs, however,
an output may still be present if the master override signal is used.
2. Master override is an input connected via an internal relay contact to the output when the
module is not active. If connected to an external source, the master override input must be fused
by a 1/16 A fuse.
3. If the master override is not connected to an external source, then it must be connected to
common of that channel.The master override relay transition time is typically 2 ms.
4. The master override inputs must be from an external supply with a source impedance of <200Ω
or tied to system common. These inputs for channels that are in use should not be allowed to
float and may be unique for each.
NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The output levels of this module are either those generated within the module based on
data inputs from the system, or from the master override inputs on the field-wiring terminal strip.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

150 35010516 09/2020


140 AVO 020 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 4 Channel OUT


External Power Not required
Bus Current required (Module) 700 mA
Power Dissipation 4.5 W max.
I/O map 4 output words
Error Detection None
Wiring length 400 m max.

Output Ranges*
Output Ranges*

Voltages (Bipolar) +/- 10 VDC (Min. load resistance = 1 kohms)


+/- 5 VDC (Min. load resistance = 500 ohms)
Voltages (Unipolar) 0 ...10 VDC (Min. load resistance = 1 kohms)
0 ... 5 VDC (Min. load resistance = 500 ohms)
Output Current +/- 10 mA max. (any range)
Outputs are shortcut proof
Source Resistance 0.1 ohms

NOTE: *The range is determined by Jumpers (see wiring diagram)

Resolution / Accuracy
Resolution / Accuracy

Resolution 12 bit
Accuracy Error @ 25 degrees C +/- 0.15% of full scale
Linearity +/- 1 LSB

Accuracy Drift with Temperature


Accuracy Drift with Temperature

Unipolar Ranges Typical: 0.003% of full scale / degrees C


Maximum: 0.005% of full scale / degrees C
Bipolar Ranges Typical: 0.004% of full scale / degrees C
Maximum: 0.007% of full scale / degrees C

35010516 09/2020 151


140 AVO 020 00

Times
Times

Max. Settling Time 700 μs to +/- 0.1% of the final value


Update Time 3 ms for all channels

Isolation
Isolation

Channel to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute


Channel to Channel 500 VAC rms for 1 minute

Fuses
Fuses

Internal Not required


External An external fuse is required on the master override
signal when it is connected to an external source.
The required fuse is 1/16 A or 0.063 A fuse:
Fuse Type: 3 AG Fast acting 1/16 A, 250 V
Fuse Holder: 3 AG Fuse type
The external fuse is not required if master override
is connected to common

152 35010516 09/2020


140 AVO 020 00

Addressing

Flat Addressing
This module requires four contiguous, 16-bit words (%MW) for output data. The data words formats
are as follows.

Topological Addressing
Topological addresses for the 140 AVO 020 00 Output Module:

Point I/O Object Comment


Output 1 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Output 2 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
Output 3 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.3 Value
Output 4 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.4 Value

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

I/O Map Status Byte


There is no I/O map status byte used by the 140 AVO 020 00 Output Module.

35010516 09/2020 153


140 AVO 020 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping WORD (%MW-4X) -
Outputs Starting 1 -
Address
Outputs Ending Address 4 -
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if module in
(Grayed if module in AUX0 other than local
other than local) AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
Channels
ENABLE/DISABLE ALL ENABLE DISABLE (1) DISABLE all channels in case
CHANNELS... of system crash or timeout
Channel1 HOLD LAST VALUE DISABLE DISABLE option is displayed
USER DEFINED but not available.
Timeout Value 0 0-4095 only enabled if Channel =
USER DEFINED
Channel2-Channel4 see Channel1

Legend
(1): Output LEDs 1-4 go out when DISABLE is selected and the module goes to the inactive state.

154 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Analog IN / OUT Modules
35010516 09/2020

Part IV
Analog IN / OUT Modules

Analog IN / OUT Modules

35010516 09/2020 155


Analog IN / OUT Modules

156 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 AMM 090 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 12
140 AMM 090 00: Analog Mixed Current/Voltage IN / OUT Module

140 AMM 090 00: Analog Mixed Current/Voltage IN / OUT


Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 AMM 090 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 158
Indicators 159
Wiring Diagram 160
Specifications 163
Addressing 168
Parameter Configuration 171

35010516 09/2020 157


140 AMM 090 00

Presentation

Function
The Analog In/Out 4/2 bi-directional module combines four analog inputs which accept a mix of
current and voltage, with two isolated analog outputs that control and monitor current in 4 ... 20 mA
loops.
NOTE: This module is HART compatible

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 AMM 090 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

158 35010516 09/2020


140 AMM 090 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 AMM 090 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 AMM 090 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red No power applied to the output group(s) or input out of
range
1 ... 2 Green Module outputs switched ON.
(left
column)
1 ... 2 Red Broken wire on indicated output channels.
(middle
column)
1 ... 4 Red Indicates input status: under/over range
(right
column)

Diagnostic
To prevent improper fault indications, unused inputs should have the + (plus) and - (minus) inputs
tied together and be configured for a bipolar input range.

35010516 09/2020 159


140 AMM 090 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration

CAUTION
UNWIRED INPUTS CAUSE INVALID READINGS
When configured for voltage inputs (no jumper installed between In(+) and sense terminals), if a
broken field wire occurs, readings will be non-zero and not predictable.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

160 35010516 09/2020


140 AMM 090 00

The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 AMM 090 00 analog input/output module.

35010516 09/2020 161


140 AMM 090 00

External Wiring Recommendation


The following information pertains to the wiring diagram above.
Output Section 2 Channels

Typical Wiring Outputs


Channel 1 The output shows a connection to an external field device
and optional monitor.
Channel 2 The output shows a connection to an external field device
and the input of channel 1.

Input Section 4 Channels

Typical Wiring Inputs


Channel 1 Channel 1 shows 4 - 20 mA current input controlled by
output section Channel 2.
Channel 4 The input shows a connection to a voltage output sensor.

1. Jumpers are required between IN (+) and SENSE terminals for all current input ranges.
2. Pins 1 ... 20 are outputs.
Pins 21 ... 40 are inputs.
3. Use shielded signal cable. In noisy environnements, twisted shielded cable is recommended.
4. Shielded cables should be connected to the PLC’s ground.
5. A Shield Bar (STB XSP 3000 and STB XSP 3010/3020) should be used to connect the shielded
cable to ground (see Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert, Hardware, Reference
Manual).
6. For Inputs, the maximum channel to channel working voltage cannot exceed 30 Vdc.
7. N / C = Not Connected.
NOTE: V is an optional voltmeter that can connected to read voltage that is proportional to the
current. Wiring to this terminal must not exceed 1 m.
NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

162 35010516 09/2020


140 AMM 090 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 4 Channel IN


2 Channel OUT (isolated)
External Power Loop Voltage:... 30 VDC, up to 60 VDC with an
external resistor
Bus Current required (Module) 350 mA
Error Detection Open circuit in 4 ... 20 mA range, or over range, or
under range in bipolar modes only.

Operating Ranges
Operating Ranges

Bipolar +/- 10 VDC


+/- 5 VDC
+/- 20 mA
Unipolar 0 ...10 VDC
0 ... 5 VDC
0 ... 20 mA
Unipolar with Offset 1 ... 5 VDC
4 ... 20 mA

Voltage / Input
Voltage / Input

Operating Voltage (Channel to +/- 40 VDC (max.)


Channel)
Absolute Voltage (max.) +/- 50 VDC
Linear Mesuring Range 2.4% over and under range
Input Impedance in Range > 10 Mohms
Input Impedance over Range < 0.5 Mohms

35010516 09/2020 163


140 AMM 090 00

Current / Input
Current / Input

Absolute Current (max.) +/- 25 mA


Linear Measuring Range 2.4% over and -9.6% under range.
Input Impedance 250 ohms

When configured for current inputs (jumper installed between IN(+) and SENSE terminals), a
broken field wire results in a zero current reading.
If 4 ... 20 mA is selected, error LEDs and warning/out of range are displayed.

Resolution / Conversion
Resolution / Conversion

16 bit +/- 10 VDC, 0 ...10 VDC


15 bit +/- 5 VDC, 0 ...5 VDC, +/- 20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA
14 bit 1 ... 5 VDC; 4 ... 20 mA
Absolute Accuracy Error @ 25 degrees C Voltage mode:
 Typical: +/- 0.03% of full scale
 Maximum: +/- 0.05% of full scale

Current mode:
 Add an extra +/- 0.03% to voltage specification

Linearity Monotonic +/- 1 LSB


Offset 0 ... 60 degrees C +/- 0.0014% of full scale max.
Gain Shift 0 ... 60 degrees C +/- 0.002% of full scale max.
Common Mode Rejection Better than 80 dB @ 50 or 60 Hz
Input Filter Single pole low pass, -3 dB @ 21 Hz, +/- 20%
Update Time 320 ms for 4 channels

Isolation
Isolation

Channel to Bus 500 VAC rms for 1 minute


750 VDC rms for 1 minute
Channel to Channel 500 VAC rms for 1 minute
750 VDC rms for 1 minute

164 35010516 09/2020


140 AMM 090 00

Linear Measuring Ranges Table


The following table shows the linear measuring ranges for the Inputs.

Data Format Input Under Normal Over Range


Range
16-bit Format +/- 10 V < 768 768 ... 64768 > 64768
+/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA < 16768 16768 ... 48768 > 48768
0 ... 10 V 0 ... 64000 > 64000
0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 32000 > 32000
1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA <6400 6400 ... 32000 > 32000
Voltmeter* +/- 10 V < -10000 -10000 ... 10000 > 10000
Format
+/-5 V < -5000 -5000 ... 5000 > 5000
0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10000 > 10000
0 ... 5 V 0 ... 5000 > 5000
1 ... 5 V < 1000 1000 ... 5000 > 5000
+/- 20 mA < 1000 -20000 ... 20000 > 20000
0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20000 > 20000
4 ... 20 mA < 4000 4000 ... 20000 > 20000
12-bit Format +/- 10 V 0 0 ... 4095 4095
+/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA 0 0 ... 4095 4095
0 ... 10 V 0 ... 4095 4095
0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA 0 ... 4095 4095
1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA 0 0 ... 4095 4095

* The Voltmeter ranges are listed in Modsoft signed format.

Fuses
Fuses

Internal Not required


External User installed per local and national electrical codes

35010516 09/2020 165


140 AMM 090 00

Output Specifications
Output Specifications

Loop Voltage ... 30 VDC, up to 60 VDC with an external resistor


Loop Resistance *=( - 30 VDC) / 0.020 A

=( - 7 VDC) / 0.020 A

* No is required for loop voltage less than


30 VDC
Internal Voltage Drop 7 VDC min., 30 VDC max. @ 20 mA
Fault Detection Open circuit in 4 ... 20 mA range, or over range, or
under range in bipolar modes only.

Resolution / Conversion
Resolution / Conversion

Resolution 12 bit
Accuracy Error at 25 degrees C +/- 0.20% of full scale
Accuracy Error @ 0 ...60 degrees C Typical: +/- 0.004% of full scale
(voltage mode) Maximum: +/- 0.07% of full scale
Linearity Monotonic +/- 1 LSB
Update Time 15 ms for 2 Channels
Settling time 900 micro sec to +/- 0.1 % of final value
Fault Detection Open circuit indicator light and status byte

A range warning is issued when a channel input is outside the rated input value. Warning bits stay
on after out of range bits are set. An out-of-range bit is set when a channel input exceeds the rated
input value by 2.4%. Out of range bits are also set if inputs drop below 0.5V (1 ... 5V mode) or 2.08
mA (4 ... 20 mA mode)

Isolation
Isolation

Channel to Bus 500 VAC rms for 1 minute


750 VDC rms for 1 minute
Channel to Channel 500 VAC rms for 1 minute
750 VDC rms for 1 minute

166 35010516 09/2020


140 AMM 090 00

Voltmeter Monitor Specifications Table


The following table shows the specifications for the voltmeter monitor for the analog input/output
module.

Range 1 ... 5 V (Loop current must be active)


Scaling (mA) x 0.250 = (volts)

Output Impedance 300 ohms typical


Maximum Wire Length 1 meter

35010516 09/2020 167


140 AMM 090 00

Addressing

Flat Addressing
This module requires five contiguous, 16-bit input words (%IW)—four for input data, one for channel
status, and 2 contiguous, 16-bit output words (%QW)— for output data. The data word formats are
as follows.
The following shows the input words 1 ... 4:

The following shows the input word 5:

*A range warning is issued when a channel input exceeds the rated input value. An out-of-range
bit is set when a channel input exceeds the rated input value by 2.4% or when a broken wire (4 ...
20 mA mode) is sensed on the channel.

168 35010516 09/2020


140 AMM 090 00

The following shows the output words 1 and 2:

Topological Addressing
Topological addresses for the 140 AMM 090 00 Input/Output Module:

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
%I[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Out of range
%I[\b.e\]r.m.1.2 Range warning
•••
Input 4 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.4 Value
%I[\b.e\]r.m.4.1 Out of range
%I[\b.e\]r.m.4.2 Range warning
Status Word %IW[\b.e\]r.m.5 Status of in/out channels
Output 1 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
%I[\b.e\]r.m.1.3 Broken wire
Output 2 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
%I[\b.e\]r.m.2.3 Broken wire

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

35010516 09/2020 169


140 AMM 090 00

IODDT
The 140 AMM 090 00 Input/Output Module uses the T_ANA_BI_VWE IODDT for the first 2 input
and output channels and the T_ANA_IN_VWE for the input channels 3 and 4:

IODDT Name Object Data Type Name


T_ANA_BI_VWE %CH[\b.e\]r.m.c ANA_IN_VWE userdefined
%IWr.m.c.0 Int .VALUE_IN
%IQr.m.c.0 Int .VALUE_OUT
%Ir.m.c.1 Bool .ERROR_IN
%Ir.m.c.2 Bool .WARNING_IN
%Ir.m.c.3 Bool .ERROR_OUT
T_ANA_IN_VWE %CH[\b.e\]r.m.c ANA_IN_VWE userdefined
%IWr.m.c.0 Int .VALUE
%Ir.m.c.1 Bool .ERROR
%Ir.m.c.2 Bool .WARNING

Used abbreviations: r = rack, m = module slot, c = channel, b = bus, e = equipment (drop).


Bus and Drop default to 1 if not specified and can be left off.
NOTE: In Quantum IODDTs for analog modules and expert modules the data type Bool is used for
%I and %Q.

I/O Map Status Byte


The I/O map status byte is used by the 140 AMM 090 00 Input Module as follows.

170 35010516 09/2020


140 AMM 090 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping WORD (%IW-3X%MW- -
4X)
Inputs Starting 1 -
Address
Inputs Ending 4 -
Address
Outputs Starting 1 -
Address
Outputs Ending 2 -
Address
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if module in other
(Grayed if module in AUX0 than local
other than local) AUX1
AUX2
AUX3

35010516 09/2020 171


140 AMM 090 00

Name Default Value Options Description


Data Format 16 bit format Volt meter
12 bit format
Input Range
Channel1 NOT INSTALLED -10V TO +10V
0V TO 10V
-5V TO +5V
0V TO +5V
+1V TO +5V
-20 mA TO +20 mA
0 mA TO +20 mA
+4 mA TO +20 mA
Channel2-Channel4 see Channel1
Output
Channel1 HOLD LAST VALUE NOT INSTALLED
USER DEFINED
Value 0 0-4095 only enabled if Channel =
USER DEFINED
Channel2 see Channel1

172 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Discrete IN Modules
35010516 09/2020

Part V
Discrete IN Modules

Discrete IN Modules

Introduction
The following part provides information on the Quantum Discrete IN modules.

What Is in This Part?


This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
13 General Information 175
14 140 DDI 153 10: 5 VDC 4x8 Source IN Module 177
15 140 DDI 353 00: 24 VDC 4x8 Sink IN Module 185
16 140 DDI 353 10: 24 VDC 4x8 Source IN Module 193
17 140 DDI 364 00: 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast IN Module 201
18 140 DDI 673 00: 125 VDC 3x8 Sink IN Module 211
19 140 DDI 841 00: 10 ... 60 VDC 8x2 Sink IN Module 221
20 140 DDI 853 00: 10 ... 60 VDC 4x8 Sink IN Module 229
21 140 DAI 340 00: 24 VAC 16x1 IN Module 237
22 140 DAI 353 00: 24 VAC 4x8 IN Module 245
23 140 DAI 440 00: 48 VAC 16x1 IN Module 253
24 140 DAI 453 00: 48 VAC 4x8 IN Module 261
25 140 DAI 540 00: 115 VAC 16x1 IN Module 269
26 140 DAI 543 00: 115 VAC 2x8 IN Module 277
27 140 DAI 553 00: 115 VAC 4x8 IN Module 285
28 140 DAI 740 00: 230 VAC 16x1 IN Module 293
29 140 DAI 753 00: 230 VAC 4x8 IN Module 301
30 140 DSI 353 00: 24 VDC 2x16 Supervised IN Module 309

35010516 09/2020 173


Discrete IN Modules

174 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
General Information
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 13
General Information

General Information

Discrete I/O Logic Circuits

Discrete I/O True High Figure


The following is the true high/current sink input/current source output schematic.

Discrete I/O True Low Figure


The following is the true low/current source input/current sink output schematic.

35010516 09/2020 175


General Information

Current Sinking
This describes a physical implementation of the I/O hardware, which when in the true state, sinks
current from the external load.

Current Sourcing
This describes a physical implementation of the I/O hardware, which when in the true state,
sources current to the external load.

176 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DDI 153 10
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 14
140 DDI 153 10: 5 VDC 4x8 Source IN Module

140 DDI 153 10: 5 VDC 4x8 Source IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDI 153 10 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 178
Indicators 179
Wiring Diagram 180
Specifications 182
Parameter Configuration 184

35010516 09/2020 177


140 DDI 153 10

Presentation

Function
The DC Input 5 V 4x8 Source module accepts 5 VDC inputs. It is for use with shared input common
wired to 0 V and is compatible with TTL, -LS, -S, and CMOS logic.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDI 153 10 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

178 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 153 10

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDI 153 10 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDI 153 10 modul.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
1 ... 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 179


140 DDI 153 10

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDI 153 10 wiring diagram.

180 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 153 10

NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 181


140 DDI 153 10

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 32 IN (4 groups x 8 points)


Logic True Low
External Power (Us) 4.5 ... 5.5 VDC
Bus Current required (Module) 170 mA
Power Dissipation 5W
I/O map 2 input words
Fault Detection None

Isolation
Isolation

Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute


Group to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute

Input Rating
Input Rating

ON Level voltage 0.8 VDC maximum


ON Level current 4.0 mA @ Us = 5.5 V and Uin = 0 V
OFF Level voltage 4 VDC (min) @ Us = 5.5 V
3 VDC (min) @ Us = 4.5 V
OFF Leakage 200 μA @ Us = 5.5 V and Uin = 4 VDC
Internal Pullup Resistor 7.5 kohm
Input Protection Resistor limited

Absolute Maximum Inputs


Absolute Maximum Inputs

Continuous 5.5 VDC


1.3 ms 15 VDC decaying pulse

182 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 153 10

Response
Response

OFF - ON 250 μs (max)


ON - OFF 500 μs (max)

Fuses
Fuses

Internal Not required


External User installed per local and national electrical codes

Logic States Table


The following tables shows the logic states for the DDI 153 10 module.

Input Voltage Input State LED


≤ 0.8 VDC ON ON
≥ 4.0 VDC @ 5.5 Us OFF OFF
≥ 3.0 VDC @ 4.5 Us
No Connection OFF OFF

35010516 09/2020 183


140 DDI 153 10

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x) WORD (%IW-3X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 32 2
Address
Input Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other
in other than local) AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 42).

184 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DDI 353 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 15
140 DDI 353 00: 24 VDC 4x8 Sink IN Module

140 DDI 353 00: 24 VDC 4x8 Sink IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDI 353 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 186
Indicators 187
Wiring Diagram 188
Specifications 190
Parameter Configuration 192

35010516 09/2020 185


140 DDI 353 00

Presentation

Function
The DC Input 24 VDC 4x8 Sink module accepts 24 VDC inputs and is for use with shared input
common wired to positive potential.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDI 353 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

186 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 353 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDI 353 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDI 353 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
1 ... 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 187


140 DDI 353 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDI 353 00 wiring diagram.

NOTE: N / C = Not Connected

188 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 353 00

NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 189


140 DDI 353 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 32 IN (4 groups x 8 points)


Logic True High
External Power Not required for this module
Power Dissipation 1.7 W + 0.36 W x the number of points ON
Bus Current Required 330 mA
I/O map 2 input words
Fault Detection None

Isolation
Isolation

Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute


Group to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute

Fuses
Fuses

Internal Not required


External User installed per local and national electrical codes

Input Rating
Input Rating

ON Level voltage +15 ... +30 VDC


OFF Level voltage -3 ... +5 VDC
ON Level current 2.0 mA (min.)
OFF Level current 0.5 mA (max.)
Internal Resistance 2.5 kohms
Input Protection Resistor Limited

190 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 353 00

Absolute Maximum Inputs


Absolute Maximum Inputs

Continuous 30 VDC
1.3 ms 56 VDC decaying pulse

Response
Response

OFF - ON 1 ms (max.)
ON - OFF 1 ms (max.)

35010516 09/2020 191


140 DDI 353 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x) WORD (%IW-3X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 32 2
Address
Input Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other
in other than local) AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 42).

192 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DDI 353 10
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 16
140 DDI 353 10: 24 VDC 4x8 Source IN Module

140 DDI 353 10: 24 VDC 4x8 Source IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDI 353 10 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 194
Indicators 195
Wiring Diagram 196
Specifications 198
Parameter Configuration 200

35010516 09/2020 193


140 DDI 353 10

Presentation

Function
The 24 VDC 4x8 Source Input module accepts 24 VDC inputs and is for use with shared input
common wired to 0 V.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDI 353 10 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

194 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 353 10

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDI 353 10 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDI 353 10 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
1 ... 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 195


140 DDI 353 10

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDI 353 10 wiring diagram.

NOTE: N / C = Not Connected

196 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 353 10

NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 197


140 DDI 353 10

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 32 IN (4 groups x 8 points)


Logic True Low
External Power 19.2 ... 30 VDC
Power Dissipation 1.5 W + 0.26 W x the number of points ON
Bus Current required 330 mA max.
I/O map 2 input words
Fault Detection None

Isolation
Isolation

Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute


Group to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute

Input Rating
Input Rating

ON Level voltage -15 ... -30 VDC (reference from group supply)
OFF Level voltage 0 ... -5 VDC (reference from group supply)
ON Level current 2.0 mA min; 14 mA max
OFF Level current 0.5 mA max
Internal Resistance 2.4 kohm
Input Protection Resistor Limited

Absolute Maximum Inputs


Absolute Maximum Inputs

Continuous 30 VDC
1.3 ms 50 VDC decaying pulse

198 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 353 10

Response
Response

OFF - ON 1 ms (max)
ON - OFF 1 ms (max)

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

35010516 09/2020 199


140 DDI 353 10

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x) WORD (%IW-3X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 32 2
Address
Input Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other
in other than local) AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 42).

200 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DDI 364 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 17
140 DDI 364 00: 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast IN Module

140 DDI 364 00: 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDI 364 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 202
Indicators 205
Color Codes 206
Specifications 207
Parameter Configuration 209

35010516 09/2020 201


140 DDI 364 00

Presentation

Function
The 140 DDI 364 00 sink module accepts 24 VDC inputs.

202 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 364 00

Illustration
The front view of the 140 DDI 364 00 input module including terminal assignment numbers:

35010516 09/2020 203


140 DDI 364 00

Recommended Cables
The following table shows recommended cables, description, and their length in meters.

Cable Part Number Description Length (M)


TSXCDP301 (1) HE 10 - flying leads 3
TSXCDP501 (1) HE 10 - flying leads 5
TSXCDP102 (2) HE 10 - ribbon cable 1
TSXCDP202 (2) HE 10 - ribbon cable 2
TSXCDP302 (2) HE 10 - ribbon cable 3
TSXCDP053 (2) HE 10 - round cable 0.5
TSXCDP103 (2) HE 10 - round cable 1
TSXCDP203 (2) HE 10 - round cable 2
TSXCDP303 (2) HE 10 - round cable 3
TSXCDP503 (2) HE 10 - round cable 5

Compatible Connection Sub-Bases


The following tables shows the compatible connections sub-bases.

Channels Type
8 ABE-7H08Rxx1
8 ABE-7H08S211
16 ABE-7H16Rxx/H16Cxx
16 ABE-7H16S21
16 ABE-7H16R23
16 ABE-7H16S43
1With
the splitter sub-base ABE-7ACC02

Compatible Input Adapter Sub-Base


16 Channels, ABE-7S16E2xx/7P16F3xx

204 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 364 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDI 364 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDI 364 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Act Green Bus communication is present.
+32 Green Points 33 to 64 displayed on LED matrix.
+64 Green Points 65 to 96 displayed on LED matrix.

Pushbutton
Use the pushbutton to select input points to be displayed as per the following table:

LED +32 +64


Out 1 to 32 Off Off
Out 33 to 64 On Off
Out 65 to 96 Off On

35010516 09/2020 205


140 DDI 364 00

Color Codes

Color Codes for Input groups


Table indicating cable color coding for all input groups:

1 white 2 brown
3 green 4 yellow
5 gray 6 pink
7 blue 8 red
9 black 10 purple
11 gray/pink 12 red/blue
13 white/green 14 brown/green
15 white/yellow 16 yellow/brown
17 white/gray 18 gray/brown
19 white/pink 20 pink/brown

206 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 364 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 96 IN (6 groups x 16 points)


Power Dissipation 1.35 W + 0.13 W x the number of points ON
Bus Current required 270 mA (max.)
I/O map 6 input words

Isolation
Isolation

Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute


Group to Bus -

Input Rating
Input Rating

ON Level voltage +15 VDC


OFF Level voltage +5 VDC
ON Level current 2.5 mA (min.)
OFF Level current 0.7 mA
Internal Resistance 6.7 kohm
Input Protection Resistor Limited

Absolute Maximum Inputs


Absolute Maximum Inputs

Continuous 30 VDC
1.0 ms 50 VDC

Response
Response

OFF - ON 2.0 ms (max.)


ON - OFF 3.0 ms (max.)

35010516 09/2020 207


140 DDI 364 00

Fuses
Fuses

Internal -
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

208 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 364 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x) WORD (%IW-3X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 96 6
Address
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other
in other than local) AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 43).

35010516 09/2020 209


140 DDI 364 00

210 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DDI 673 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 18
140 DDI 673 00: 125 VDC 3x8 Sink IN Module

140 DDI 673 00: 125 VDC 3x8 Sink IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDI 673 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 212
Indicators 213
Wiring Diagram 214
Specifications 216
Parameter Configuration 219

35010516 09/2020 211


140 DDI 673 00

Presentation

Function
The DC Input 125 VDC 3x8 Sink module accepts 125 VDC inputs and is for use with shared input
common wired to positive potential. The module has software-selectable response time to provide
additional input filtering.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDI 673 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

212 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 673 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDI 673 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDI 673 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
1 ... 24 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 213


140 DDI 673 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the DDI 673 00 wiring diagram.

NOTE: N / C = Not Connected

214 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 673 00

NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 215


140 DDI 673 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 24 IN (3 groups x 8 points)


Logic True High
External Power Not required for this module
Power Dissipation 1.0 W + 0.62 W x the number of points ON
Bus Current required 200 mA (max.)
I/O map 2 input words
Error Detection None

Isolation
Isolation

Group to Group 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute


Group to Bus 2500 VAC rms for 1 minute

Input Rating
Input Rating

ON Level voltage +88 ... +150 VDC


OFF Level voltage 0 ... +36 VDC
ON Level current 2.0 mA (min.)
OFF Level current 0.5 mA (max.)
Internal Resistance OFF State: 73.8 kohms (nominal)
ON State: 31.6 kohms (nominal)
Input Protection Resistor Limited
Absolute Voltage (max.) Continuous : 156 VDC including ripple

Response
Response

OFF - ON 0.7 ms (Default filter)


1.5 ms (Non default filter)
ON - OFF 0.7 ms (Default filter)
1.5 ms (Non default filter)

216 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 673 00

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

Operating Curve Figure


The following figure shows the 140 DDI 673 00 operating curve.

NOTE: The following information baselines minimum version levels that will support this module.

35010516 09/2020 217


140 DDI 673 00

Minimum Version Levels


The following table shows the minimum version level for the module products.

Products Minimum Version Level (see User Action Required


label illustration below
CPUs and NOMs < V02.20 Executive upgrade to > V02.10
≥ V02.20 None
RIOs < V02.00 Module upgrade
≥ V02.00 and < V02.20 Executive upgrade to > V02.10
> V02.20 None
DIOs < V02.10 Module upgrade
≥ V02.10 None

CAUTION
SOFTWARE INCOMPATIBILITY CAUSES INVALID INPUT READINGS
Ensure that the minimum version levels are met as identified in the table above. When using a
DIO drop, and the CPU and NOM executive software is not per the compatibility chart, channels
17 ... 24 of this module will be seen as zeroes in the controller when configured as discretes.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

The procedure to update the version level on your module product is decribed in the OS Loader
user manual

Version Label Figure


The following figure shows the version label.

NOTE: The version label is found on the top front of the module.

218 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 673 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x) WORD (%IW-3X)
Intputs Starting 1 1
Address
Intputs Ending 24 2
Address
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other than
in other than local) AUX1 local
AUX2
AUX3
FILTER_SELECTION
Input Type BINARY BCD
Group A 0.7 ms 1.5 ms
Group B, Group C see Group A

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 41).

35010516 09/2020 219


140 DDI 673 00

220 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DDI 841 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 19
140 DDI 841 00: 10 ... 60 VDC 8x2 Sink IN Module

140 DDI 841 00: 10 ... 60 VDC 8x2 Sink IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDI 841 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 222
Indicators 223
Wiring Diagram 224
Specifications 226
Parameter Configuration 228

35010516 09/2020 221


140 DDI 841 00

Presentation

Function
The DC Input 10 ... 60 VDC 8x2 Sink module accepts 10 ... 60 VDC inputs and is for use with
shared input common wired to positive potential. ON-OFF levels are dependent on the reference
voltage selected. Different reference voltages may be used for different groups.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDI 841 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

222 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 841 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDI 841 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDI 841 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
1 ... 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 223


140 DDI 841 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDI 841 00 wiring diagram.

NOTE: N / C = Not Connected

224 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 841 00

NOTE: The module reads 0V if the polarity is reversed i.e. digital input is off if zero volt is given in
place of 24V input channel.
NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 225


140 DDI 841 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 16 IN (8 groups x 2 points)


Logic True High
External Power 10 ... 60 VDC (group supply)
Power Dissipation 1.0 W + 0.25 W x the number of points ON
Bus Current required 200 mA
I/O map 1 input word

Group Supply / Tolerance


Group Supply / Tolerance

Group supply / Tolerance ON* State OFF* State


12 VDC / +/-5% 9 ... 12 VDC 0 ... 1.8 VDC IEC 57 Class2
24 VDC / -15% ... +20% 11 ... 24 VDC 0 ... 5 VDC IEC 65A Type 2
48 VDC / -15% ... +20% 34 ... 48 VDC 0 ... 10 VDC IEC 65A Type 1
60 VDC / -15% ... +20% 45 ... 60 VDC 0 ... 9 VDC IEC 57 Class1
*ON / OFF state ranges are
specified at nominal reference
voltages.

Isolation
Isolation

Group to Group 700 VDC for 1 minute


Group to Bus 2500 VDC for 1 minute

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

226 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 841 00

Input Rating
Input Rating

Absolute Maximum Input 75 VDC


Input Protection Resistor Limited

ON State Current
ON State Current

@ 12 VDC 5 ... 10 mA
@ 24 VDC 6 ... 30 mA
@ 48 VDC 2 ... 15 mA
@ 60 VDC 1 ... 5 mA

Response / Switching Frequency


Response / Switching Frequency

OFF - ON 4 ms
ON - OFF 4 ms
Switching Frequency < 100 Hz

35010516 09/2020 227


140 DDI 841 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x) WORD (%IW-3X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 16 1
Address
Input Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other
in other than local) AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 40).

228 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DDI 853 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 20
140 DDI 853 00: 10 ... 60 VDC 4x8 Sink IN Module

140 DDI 853 00: 10 ... 60 VDC 4x8 Sink IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDI 853 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 230
Indicators 231
Wiring Diagram 232
Specifications 234
Parameter Configuration 236

35010516 09/2020 229


140 DDI 853 00

Presentation

Function
The DC Input 10 ... 60 VDC 4x8 Sink module accepts 10 ... 60 VDC inputs and is for use with
shared input common wired to positive potential. ON-OFF levels are dependent on the reference
voltage selected. Different reference voltages may be used for different groups.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDI 853 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

230 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 853 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDI 853 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDI 853 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
1 ... 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 231


140 DDI 853 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDI 853 00 wiring diagram.

NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.

232 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 853 00

NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 233


140 DDI 853 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 32 IN (4 groups x 8 points)


Logic True High
External Power 10 ... 60 VDC (group supply)
Power Dissipation 1.0 W + 0.25 W x the number of points ON
Bus Current required 300 mA
I/O map 2 input words
Fault Detection None

Group supply / Tolerance


Group supply / Tolerance

Group supply / Tolerance ON* State OFF* State


12 VDC / +/-5% 9 ... 12 VDC 0 ... 1.8 VDC
24 VDC / -15% ... +20% 11 ... 24 VDC 0 ... 5 VDC IEC61131
48 VDC / -15% ... +20% 34 ... 48 VDC 0 ... 10 VDC IEC61131
60 VDC / -15% ... +20% 45 ... 60 VDC 0 ... 12.5 VDC
*ON / OFF state ranges are
specified at nominal reference
voltages.

Isolation
Isolation

Group to Group 700 VDC for 1 minute


Group to Bus 2500 VDC for 1 minute

Input Rating
Input Rating

Absolute Maximum Input 75 VDC


Input Protection Resistor Limited

234 35010516 09/2020


140 DDI 853 00

ON State Current
ON State Current

@ 12 VDC 5 ... 10 mA
@ 24 VDC 6 ... 30 mA
@ 48 VDC 2 ... 15 mA
@ 60 VDC 1 ... 5 mA

Response / Switching Frequency


Response / Switching Frequency

OFF - ON 4 ms
ON - OFF 4 ms
Switching Frequency < 100 Hz max.

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

35010516 09/2020 235


140 DDI 853 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x) WORD (%IW-3X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 32 2
Address
Input Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other
in other than local) AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 42).

236 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DAI 340 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 21
140 DAI 340 00: 24 VAC 16x1 IN Module

140 DAI 340 00: 24 VAC 16x1 IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAI 340 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 238
Indicators 239
Wiring Diagram 240
Specifications 242
Parameter Configuration 244

35010516 09/2020 237


140 DAI 340 00

Presentation

Function
The AC Input 24 VAC 16x1 module accepts 24 VAC inputs.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 340 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

238 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 340 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAI 340 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAI 340 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
1 ... 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 239


140 DAI 340 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 340 00 wiring diagram.

NOTE: This module is not polarity sensitive.


N / C = Not Connected.

240 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 340 00

NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 241


140 DAI 340 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 16 IN (16 groups x 1 point) individually isolated


External Power Not required for this module
Power Dissipation 5.5 W (max.)
Bus Current required 180 mA
I/O map 1 input word
Fault Detection None

Operating Voltage and Input Current*


Operating Voltage and Input Current*

47 - 53 Hz ON: 18 ... 30 VAC (10.7 mA max.)


OFF: 0 ... 5 VAC
57 - 63 Hz ON: 16 ... 30 VAC (12 mA max.)
OFF: 0 ... 6 VAC
* Do not use outside the 47 ... 63 Hz range
Maximum Allowable Leakage Current 1.9 mA
from an External Device to be
recognized as an OFF Condition.

Typical Input Impedance


Typical Imput Impedance

50 Hz 3.1 kohms capacitive


60 Hz 2.6 kohms

Isolation
Isolation

Input to Input 1780 VAC for 1 minute


Input to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute

242 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 340 00

Absolute Maximum Input


Absolute Maximum Input

Continuous 30 VAC
10 s 32 VAC
1 Cycle 50 VAC

Response
Response

OFF - ON Min: 4.9 ms. Max: 0.75 line cycle.


ON - OFF Min: 7.3 ms. Max: 12.3 ms.

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

35010516 09/2020 243


140 DAI 340 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x) WORD (%IW-3X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 16 1
Address
Input Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other
in other than local) AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 40).

244 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DAI 353 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 22
140 DAI 353 00: 24 VAC 4x8 IN Module

140 DAI 353 00: 24 VAC 4x8 IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAI 353 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 246
Indicators 247
Wiring Diagram 248
Specifications 250
Parameter Configuration 252

35010516 09/2020 245


140 DAI 353 00

Presentation

Function
The AC Input 24 VAC 4x8 module accepts 24 VAC inputs.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 353 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

246 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 353 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAI 353 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAI 353 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red A fault (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 247


140 DAI 353 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 353 00 wiring diagram.

NOTE: This module is not polarity sensitive.

248 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 353 00

N / C = Not Connected.
NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 249


140 DAI 353 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 32 IN (4 groups x 8 points)


External Power Not required for this module
Power Dissipation 10.9 W (max.)
Bus Current required 250 mA
I/O map 2 input words
Fault Detection None

Operating Voltage and Input Current*


Operating Voltage and Input Current*

50 Hz ON: 14 ... 30 VAC (11.1 mA max)


OFF: 0 ... 5 VAC
60 Hz ON: 12 ... 30 VAC (13.2 mA max)
OFF: 0 ... 5 VAC
* Do not use outside the 47 ... 63 Hz range
Maximum Allowable Leakage Current 1.9 mA
from an External Device to be
recognized as an OFF Condition.

Typical Input Impedance


Typical Imput Impedance

50 Hz 3.1 kohms capacitive


60 Hz 2.6 kohms capacitive

Isolation
Isolation

Group to Group 1780 VAC for 1 minute


Input to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute

250 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 353 00

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

Absolute Maximum Input


Absolute Maximum Input

Continuous 30 VAC
10 s 32 VAC
1 Cycle 50 VAC

Response
Response

OFF - ON Min: 4.9 ms. Max: 0.75 line cycle.


ON - OFF Min: 7.3 ms. Max: 12.3 ms.

NOTE: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency.

35010516 09/2020 251


140 DAI 353 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x) WORD (%IW-3X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 32 2
Address
Input Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other
in other than local) AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 42).

252 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DAI 440 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 23
140 DAI 440 00: 48 VAC 16x1 IN Module

140 DAI 440 00: 48 VAC 16x1 IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAI 440 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 254
Indicators 255
Wiring Diagram 256
Specifications 258
Parameter Configuration 260

35010516 09/2020 253


140 DAI 440 00

Presentation

Function
The AC Input 48 VAC 16x1 module accepts 48 VAC inputs.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 440 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

254 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 440 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAI 440 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAI 440 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
1 ... 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 255


140 DAI 440 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 440 00 wiring diagram.

NOTE: This module is not polarity sensitive.

256 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 440 00

N / C = Not Connected
NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 257


140 DAI 440 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 16 individually isolated


External Power Not required for this module
Power Dissipation 5.5 W (max.)
Bus Current required 180 mA
I/O map 1 input word
Fault Detection None

Operating Voltage and Input Current*


Operating Voltage and Input Current*

47 - 53 Hz ON: 36 ... 56 VAC (9.3 mA max)


OFF: 0 ... 10 VAC
57 - 63 Hz ON: 34 ... 56 VAC (11 mA max)
OFF: 0 ... 10 VAC
* Do not use outside the 47 ... 63 Hz range
Maximum Allowable Leakage Current 1.7 mA
from an External Device to be
recognized as an OFF Condition.

Typical Input Impedance


Typical Imput Impedance

50 Hz 6.8 kohms capacitive


60 Hz 5.6 kohms capacitive

Isolation
Isolation

Group to Group 1780 VAC for 1 minute


Input to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute

258 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 440 00

Absolute Maximum Input


Absolute Maximum Input

Continuous 56 VAC
10 s 63 VAC
1 Cycle 100 VAC

Response
Response

OFF - ON Min: 4.9 ms. Max: 0.75 line cycle.


ON - OFF Min: 7.3 ms. Max: 12.3 ms.

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

NOTE: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency.

35010516 09/2020 259


140 DAI 440 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x) WORD (%IW-3X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 16 1
Address
Input Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other
in other than local) AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 40).

260 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DAI 453 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 24
140 DAI 453 00: 48 VAC 4x8 IN Module

140 DAI 453 00: 48 VAC 4x8 IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAI 453 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 262
Indicators 263
Wiring Diagram 264
Specifications 266
Parameter Configuration 268

35010516 09/2020 261


140 DAI 453 00

Presentation

Function
The AC Input 48 VAC 4x8 module accepts 48 VAC inputs.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 453 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

262 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 453 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAI 453 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAI 453 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red An error (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 263


140 DAI 453 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 453 00 wiring diagram.

NOTE: This module is not polarity sensitive.

264 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 453 00

N / C = Not Connected.
NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 265


140 DAI 453 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 32 IN (4 groups x 8 points)


External Power Not required for this module
Power Dissipation 10.9 W (max.)
Bus Current required 250 mA
I/O map 2 input words
Fault Detection None

Operating Voltage and Input Current*


Operating Voltage and Input Current*

50 Hz ON: 34 ... 56 VAC (9.8 mA max)


OFF: 0 ... 10 VAC
60 Hz ON: 29 ... 56 VAC (11.7 mA max)
OFF: 0 ... 10 VAC
* Do not use outside the 47 ... 63 Hz range
Maximum Allowable Leakage Current 1.7 mA
from an External Device to be
recognized as an OFF Condition.

Typical Input Impedance


Typical Imput Impedance

50 Hz 6.8 kohms capacitive


60 Hz 5.6 kohms capacitive

Isolation
Isolation

Group to Group 1780 VAC for 1 minute


Input to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute

266 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 453 00

Absolute Maximum Input


Absolute Maximum Input

Continuous 56 VAC
10 s 63 VAC
1 Cycle 100 VAC

Response
Response

OFF - ON Min: 4.9 ms. Max: 0.75 line cycle.


ON - OFF Min: 7.3 ms. Max: 12.3 ms.

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

NOTE: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency.

35010516 09/2020 267


140 DAI 453 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x) WORD (%IW-3X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 32 2
Address
Input Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other
in other than local) AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 42).

268 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DAI 540 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 25
140 DAI 540 00: 115 VAC 16x1 IN Module

140 DAI 540 00: 115 VAC 16x1 IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAI 540 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 270
Indicators 271
Wiring Diagram 272
Specifications 274
Parameter Configuration 276

35010516 09/2020 269


140 DAI 540 00

Presentation

Function
The AC Input 115 VAC 16x1 module accepts 115 VAC inputs.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 540 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

270 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 540 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAI 540 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAI 540 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
1 ... 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 271


140 DAI 540 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 540 00 wiring diagram.

1. N / C = Not Connected.
2. This module is not polarity sensitive.
3. When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG or 2-16 AWG;
the minimum size is 20 AWG.

272 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 540 00

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Ensure that all inputs in a group are from the same phase of line input voltage.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 273


140 DAI 540 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 16 IN (16 groups x 1 point)


External Power Not required for this module
Power Dissipation 5.5 W (max.)
Bus Current required 180 mA
I/O map 1 input word
Fault Detection None

Operating Voltage and Input Current*


Operating Voltage and Input Current*

50 Hz ON: 85 ... 132 VAC (11.1 mA max)


OFF: 0 ... 20 VAC
60 Hz ON: 79 ... 132 VAC (13.2 mA max)
OFF: 0 ... 20 VAC
* Do not use outside the 47 ... 63 Hz range
Maximum Allowable Leakage Current 2.1 mA
from an External Device to be
recognized as an OFF Condition.

Typical Input Impedance


Typical Imput Impedance

50 Hz 14.4 kohms capacitive


60 Hz 12 kohms capacitive

Isolation
Isolation

Input to Input 1780 VAC for 1 minute


Input to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute

274 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 540 00

Absolute Maximum Input


Absolute Maximum Input

Continuous 132 VAC


10 s 156 VAC
1 Cycle 200 VAC

Response
Response

OFF - ON Min: 4.9 ms. Max: 0.75 line cycle.


ON - OFF Min: 7.3 ms. Max: 12.3 ms.

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

NOTE: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency.

35010516 09/2020 275


140 DAI 540 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x) WORD (%IW-3X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 16 1
Address
Input Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX1 module in other
in other than local) AUX2 than local
AUX3

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 40).

276 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DAI 543 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 26
140 DAI 543 00: 115 VAC 2x8 IN Module

140 DAI 543 00: 115 VAC 2x8 IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAI 543 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 278
Indicators 279
Wiring Diagram 280
Specifications 282
Parameter Configuration 284

35010516 09/2020 277


140 DAI 543 00

Presentation

Function
The AC Input 115 VAC 2x8 module accepts 115 VAC inputs.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 543 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

278 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 543 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAI 543 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAI 543 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
1 ... 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 279


140 DAI 543 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 543 00 wiring diagram.

NOTE: All inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line-input voltage.
This module is not polarity sensitive.

280 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 543 00

N / C = Not Connected.
NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Ensure that all inputs in a group are from the same phase of line input voltage
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 281


140 DAI 543 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 16 IN (2 groups x 8 points)


External Power Not required for this module
Power Dissipation 5.5 W (max)
Bus Current required 180 mA
I/O map 1 input word
Fault Detection None

Operating Voltage and Input Current*


Operating Voltage and Input Current*

50 Hz ON: 85 ... 132 VAC (11.1 mA max)


OFF: 0 ... 20 VAC
60 Hz ON: 79 ... 132 VAC (13.2 mA max)
OFF: 0 ... 20 VAC
* Do not use outside the 47 ... 63 Hz range
Maximum Allowable Leakage Current 2.1 mA
from an External Device to be
recognized as an OFF Condition.

Typical Input Impedance


Typical Imput Impedance

50 Hz 14.4 kohms capacitive


60 Hz 12 kohms capacitive

Isolation
Isolation

Group to Group 1780 VAC for 1 minute


Input to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute

282 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 543 00

Absolute Maximum Input


Absolute Maximum Input

Continuous 132 VAC


10 s 156 VAC
1 Cycle 200 VAC
1.3 ms 276 VAC

Response
Response

OFF - ON Min: 4.9 ms. Max: 0.75 line cycle.


ON - OFF Min: 7.3 ms. Max: 12.3 ms.

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

NOTE: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency.

35010516 09/2020 283


140 DAI 543 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x) WORD (%IW-3X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 16 1
Address
Input Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other
in other than local) AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 40).

284 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DAI 553 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 27
140 DAI 553 00: 115 VAC 4x8 IN Module

140 DAI 553 00: 115 VAC 4x8 IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAI 553 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 286
Indicators 287
Wiring Diagram 288
Specifications 290
Parameter Configuration 292

35010516 09/2020 285


140 DAI 553 00

Presentation

Function
The AC Input 115 VAC 4x8 module accepts 115 VAC inputs.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 553 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

286 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 553 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAI 553 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAI 553 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
1 ... 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 287


140 DAI 553 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 553 00 wiring diagram.

1. N / C = Not Connected.
2. This module is not polarity sensitive.
3. When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG or 2-16 AWG;
the minimum size is 20 AWG.

288 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 553 00

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Ensure that all inputs in a group are from the same phase of line input voltage.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 289


140 DAI 553 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 32 IN (4 groups x 8 points)


External Power Not required for this module
Power Dissipation 10.9 W (max)
Bus Current required 250 mA
I/O map 2 input words
Fault Detection None

Operating Voltage and Input Current*


Operating Voltage and Input Current*

50 Hz ON: 85 ... 132 VAC (11.1 mA max)


OFF: 0 ... 20 VAC
60 Hz ON: 79 ... 132 VAC (13.2 mA max)
OFF: 0 ... 20 VAC
* Do not use outside the 47 ... 63 Hz range
Maximum Allowable Leakage Current 2.1 mA
from an External Device to be
recognized as an OFF Condition.

Typical Input Impedance


Typical Imput Impedance

50 Hz 14.4 kohms capacitive


60 Hz 12 kohms capacitive

Isolation
Isolation

Group to Group 1780 VAC for 1 minute


Input to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute

290 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 553 00

Absolute Maximum Input


Absolute Maximum Input

Continuous 132 VAC


10 s 156 VAC
1 Cycle 200 VAC

Response
Response

OFF - ON Min: 4.9 ms. Max: 0.75 line cycle.


ON - OFF Min: 7.3 ms. Max: 12.3 ms.

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

NOTE: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency.

35010516 09/2020 291


140 DAI 553 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x) WORD (%IW-3X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 32 2
Address
Input Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other
in other than local) AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 42).

292 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DAI 740 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 28
140 DAI 740 00: 230 VAC 16x1 IN Module

140 DAI 740 00: 230 VAC 16x1 IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAI 740 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 294
Indicators 295
Wiring Diagram 296
Specifications 298
Parameter Configuration 300

35010516 09/2020 293


140 DAI 740 00

Presentation

Function
The AC Input 230 VAC 16x1 module accepts 230 VAC inputs.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 740 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

294 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 740 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAI 740 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAI 740 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
1 ... 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 295


140 DAI 740 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 740 00 wiring diagram.

NOTE: This module is not polarity sensitive.

296 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 740 00

N / C = Not Connected.
NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 297


140 DAI 740 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 16 IN (2 groups x 8 points) individually isolated


External Power Not required for this module
Power Dissipation 5.5 W (max)
Bus Current required 180 mA
I/O map 1 input word
Fault Detection None

Operating Voltage and Input Current*


Operating Voltage and Input Current*

50 Hz ON: 175 ... 264 VAC (9.7 mA max)


OFF: 0 ... 40 VAC
60 Hz ON: 165 ... 264 VAC (11.5 mA max)
OFF: 0 ... 40 VAC
* Do not use outside the 47 ... 63 Hz range
Maximum Allowable Leakage Current 2.6 mA
from an External Device to be
recognized as an OFF Condition.

Typical Input Impedance


Typical Imput Impedance

50 Hz 31.8 kohms capacitive


60 Hz 26.5 kohms capacitive

Isolation
Isolation

Input to Input 1780 VAC for 1 minute


Input to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute

298 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 740 00

Absolute Maximum Input


Absolute Maximum Input

Continuous 264 VAC


10 s 300 VAC
1 Cycle 400 VAC

Response
Response

OFF - ON Min: 4.9 ms. Max: 0.75 line cycle.


ON - OFF Min: 7.3 ms. Max: 12.3 ms.

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

NOTE: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency.

35010516 09/2020 299


140 DAI 740 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x) WORD (%IW-3X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 16 1
Address
Input Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other
in other than local) AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 40).

300 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DAI 753 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 29
140 DAI 753 00: 230 VAC 4x8 IN Module

140 DAI 753 00: 230 VAC 4x8 IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAI 753 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 302
Indicators 303
Wiring Diagram 304
Specifications 306
Parameter Configuration 308

35010516 09/2020 301


140 DAI 753 00

Presentation

Function
The AC Input 230 VAC 4x8 module accepts 230 VAC inputs.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 753 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

302 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 753 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAI 753 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAI 753 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
1 ... 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 303


140 DAI 753 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 753 00 wiring diagram.

1. N / C = Not Connected.
2. When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG or 2-16 AWG;
the minimum size is 20 AWG.

304 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 753 00

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Ensure that all inputs in a group are from the same phase of line input voltage.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 305


140 DAI 753 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 32 IN (4 groups x 8 points) individually isolated


External Power Not required for this module
Power Dissipation 9 W (max)
Bus Current required 250 mA
I/O map 2 input word
Fault Detection None

Operating Voltage and Input Current*


Operating Voltage and Input Current*

50 Hz ON: 175 ... 264 VAC (9.7 mA max)


OFF: 0 ... 40 VAC
60 Hz ON: 165 ... 264 VAC (11.5 mA max)
OFF: 0 ... 40 VAC
* Do not use outside the 47 ... 63 Hz range
Maximum Allowable Leakage Current 2.6 mA
from an External Device to be
recognized as an OFF Condition.

Typical Input Impedance


Typical Imput Impedance

50 Hz 32 kohms capacitive
60 Hz 27 kohms capacitive

Isolation
Isolation

Input to Input 1780 VAC for 1 minute


Input to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute

306 35010516 09/2020


140 DAI 753 00

Absolute Maximum Input


Absolute Maximum Input

Continuous 264 VAC


10 s 300 VAC
1 Cycle 400 VAC

Response
Response

OFF - ON Min: 4.9 ms. Max: 0.75 line cycle.


ON - OFF Min: 7.3 ms. Max: 12.3 ms.

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

NOTE: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency.

35010516 09/2020 307


140 DAI 753 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x) WORD (%IW-3X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 32 2
Address
Input Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other
in other than local) AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 42).

308 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DSI 353 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 30
140 DSI 353 00: 24 VDC 2x16 Supervised IN Module

140 DSI 353 00: 24 VDC 2x16 Supervised IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DSI 353 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 310
Indicators 311
Wiring Diagram 312
Specifications 314
Addressing 316
Parameter Configuration 318

35010516 09/2020 309


140 DSI 353 00

Presentation

Function
The 140 DSI 353 00 module is used with source output devices. It accepts 24 VDC inputs. It has
32 input points (four groups of 8), and has broken wire detection for each unit.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DSI 353 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)
NOTE: Do not use the 140 DSI 353 00 module in a DIO rack containing a 140 CRA 211 x0 module.

310 35010516 09/2020


140 DSI 353 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DSI 353 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DSI 353 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red An error (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 311


140 DSI 353 00

Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram
Wiring diagram for the 140 DSI 353 00 Module:

* Recommended resistor value for 24V DC

312 35010516 09/2020


140 DSI 353 00

NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 313


140 DSI 353 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 32 IN (2 groups x 16 points)


External Power +20 ... +30 VDC / 20 mA each group
Power Dissipation 7 W (all points on)
Bus Current required (Module) 250 mA

Operating Voltage and Current


Operating Voltage and Current

ON level current 2.5 mA (min.)


OFF level voltage +5 VDC
OFF level current min. 0.3 mA ... 1.2 mA

Response
Response

OFF - ON 2.2 ms
ON - OFF 3.3 ms

Isolation
Isolation

Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute


Group to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute

Open Circuit Monitoring


Open Circuit Monitoring

Broken wire detection OFF Current < 0.15 mA


Shunt resistor 56 kohms recommended

314 35010516 09/2020


140 DSI 353 00

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

35010516 09/2020 315


140 DSI 353 00

Addressing

Flat Addressing
This module requires 64 contiguous, input references (%I) - 32 for input data and 32 for broken
wire signal or 4 contiguous input words (%IW) 2 for input data and 2 for broken wire signal. The data
word formats are as follows.
Input Words (Data):

Input Words (Sense):

Topological Addressing
Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %I[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Value
Input 2 %I[\b.e\]r.m.2.1 Value
•••
Input 31 %I[\b.e\]r.m.31.1 Value
Input 32 %I[\b.e\]r.m.32.1 Value
Broken Wire 1 %I[\b.e\]r.m.1.2 Value
Broken Wire 2 %I[\b.e\]r.m..2.2 Value
•••
Broken Wire 31 %I[\b.e\]r.m.31.2 Value
Broken Wire 32 %I[\b.e\]r.m.32.2 Value

316 35010516 09/2020


140 DSI 353 00

Topological addresses in Word Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Inputword 1 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Value
Inputword 2 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.2 Value
Inputword 3 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.3 Broken Wire Flag
Inputword 4 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.4 Broken Wire Flag

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

I/O Map Status Byte


The eight bits in the I/O map status byte are used as follows:

35010516 09/2020 317


140 DSI 353 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x) WORD (%IW-3X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 64 4
Address
Task Mast Fast fixed to Mast if
(Grayed if module module in other
in other than local) than local

318 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Discrete OUT Modules
35010516 09/2020

Part VI
Discrete OUT Modules

Discrete OUT Modules

Introduction
The following part provides information on the Quantum Discrete OUT modules.

What Is in This Part?


This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
31 General Information 321
32 140 DDO 153 10: 5 VDC 4x8 Sink OUT Module 323
33 140 DDO 353 00: 24 VDC 4x8 Source OUT Module 333
34 140 DDO 353 01: 24 VDC 4x8 Source OUT Module 343
35 140 DDO 353 10: 24 VDC 4x8 Sink OUT Module 353
36 140 DDO 364 00: 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast OUT Module 363
37 140 DDO 843 00: 10 ... 60 VDC 2x8 Source OUT Module 373
38 140 DDO 885 00: 24 ... 125 VDC 2x6 Source OUT Module 383
39 140 DAO 840 00: 24 ... 230 VAC 16x1 OUT Module 395
40 140 DAO 840 10: 24 ... 115 VAC 16x1 OUT Module 405
41 140 DAO 842 10: 100 ... 230 VAC 4x4 OUT Module 415
42 140 DAO 842 20: 24 ... 48 VAC 4x4 OUT Module 427
43 140 DAO 853 00: 230 VAC 4x8 Source OUT Module 437
44 140 DRA 840 00: Relay 16x1 Normally Open OUT Module 447
45 140 DRC 830 00: Relay 8x1 Normally Open / Normally Closed OUT Module 455
46 140 DVO 853 00: 10 ... 30 VDC 32x1 Verified OUT Module 465

35010516 09/2020 319


Discrete OUT Modules

320 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
General Information
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 31
General Information

General Information

Discrete I/O Logic Circuits

Discrete I/O True High Figure


The following figure shows true high/current sink input/current source output schematic.

Discrete I/O True Low Figure


The following figure shows true low/current source input/current sink output schematic.

35010516 09/2020 321


General Information

Current Sinking
This describes a physical implementation of the I/O hardware, which when in the true state, sinks
current from the external load.

Current Sourcing
This describes a physical implementation of the I/O hardware, which when in the true state,
sources current to the external load.

322 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DDO 153 10
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 32
140 DDO 153 10: 5 VDC 4x8 Sink OUT Module

140 DDO 153 10: 5 VDC 4x8 Sink OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDO 153 10 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 324
Indicators 325
Wiring Diagram 326
Specifications 328
Maintenance 330
140 DDO 153 10 Parameter Configuration 331

35010516 09/2020 323


140 DDO 153 10

Presentation

Function
The DC Output 5 V 4x8 Sink module switches 5 VDC loads. It is for use with shared output common
wired to positive potential and is compatible with TTL, -LS, -S, and CMOS logic.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDO 153 10 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

324 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 153 10

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDO 153 10 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDO 153 10 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red An error (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 325


140 DDO 153 10

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDO 153 10 wiring diagram.

NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.

326 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 153 10

NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 327


140 DDO 153 10

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 32 OUT (4 groups x 8 points)


Logic True Low
External Power (Us) 4.5 ... 5.5 VDC continuous
Absolute Voltage (Us) 15 VDC for 1.3 ms decaying pulse
Power Dissipation 4W
Supply Current 400 mA + Load Current per Point
Bus Current required (Module) 350 mA
I/O map 2 output word
Fault Detection Output: Blown fuse detect, loss of field power.

Input Rating
Input Rating

ON level voltage 0.2 VDC (max.) @ 75 mA sinking


OFF level voltage Vout = Us - 1.25 V @ 1 mA source
Vout = 3.2 V (min.) @ 1 mA, Us = 4.5 V
Internal Pullup Resistor 440 ohm

Maximum Load Current / Surge Current


Maximum Load Current / Surge Current

Each Point 75 mA (sinking)


Each Group 600 mA
Per Module 2.4 A
Surge Current (max.) Each Point: 75 mA @ 500 ms duration (no more
than 6 per minute)

Isolation / Protection
Isolation / Protection

Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute


Group to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute
Output Protection Transient Voltage Suppression (internal)

328 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 153 10

Response
Response

OFF - ON 250 μs (max) - (resistive load)


ON - OFF 250 μs (max) - (resistive load)

35010516 09/2020 329


140 DDO 153 10

Maintenance

Fuses
Fuses

Internal 1 A fuse for each group. For the location of the fuses see figure
below.
External None

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before accessing the fuses,
 Remove the power to the module (sensors and pre-actuators), and
 disconnect the terminal block.
 Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Illustration
The following figure shows the locations of the fuses for the 140 DDO 153 10 module.

330 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 153 10

140 DDO 153 10 Parameter Configuration

Parameter Configuration Window

Parameter and Default Values

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%M-0x) WORD (%MW-4X)
Output Starting 1 1
Address
Output Ending 32 2
Address
Output Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other than
in other than local) AUX1 local
AUX2
AUX3
Timeout State USERDEFINED Hold Last Value
Value 1, Value 2 0 0-65535 only if Timeout
State=USERDEFINED

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 49).

35010516 09/2020 331


140 DDO 153 10

332 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DDO 353 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 33
140 DDO 353 00: 24 VDC 4x8 Source OUT Module

140 DDO 353 00: 24 VDC 4x8 Source OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDO 353 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 334
Indicators 335
Wiring Diagram 336
Specifications 338
Maintenance 340
140 DDO 353 00 Parameter Configuration 342

35010516 09/2020 333


140 DDO 353 00

Presentation

Function
The DC Output 24 VDC 4x8 Source module switches 24 VDC powered loads and is for use with
shared ouput common wired to 0 V.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDO 353 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

334 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 353 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDO 353 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDO 353 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red An error (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 335


140 DDO 353 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDO 353 00 wiring diagram.

336 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 353 00

CAUTION
OVER CURRENT TO OUTPUTS
Protect each point with a 3/4 A, 250 V fuse.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 337


140 DDO 353 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 32 OUT (4 groups x 8 points)


Logic True High
External Power 19.2 ... 30 VDC
Power Dissipation 1.75 W + 0.4 V x Total module load Current
Bus Current required (Module) 330 mA
I/O map 2 output word
Fault Detection Output: Blown fuse detect, loss of field power.

Voltage
Voltage

Operating Voltage (max.) 19.2 ... 30 VDC


Absolute Voltage (max.) 56 VDC for 1 ms decaying pulse
ON State Drop / Point 0.4 VDC @ 0.5 A

Maximum Load Current / Surge Current


Maximum Load Current / Surge Current

Each Point 0.5 A


Each Group 4A
Per Module 16 A
Surge Current (max.) Each Point: 5 mA @ 500 ms duration (no more
than 6 per minute)
OFF State Leakage / Point 0.4 mA @ 30 VDC

Isolation / Protection
Isolation / Protection

Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute


Group to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute
Output Protection Transient Voltage Suppression (internal)

338 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 353 00

Response (Resistive Loads)


Response (Resistive Loads)

OFF - ON 1 ms (max.)
ON - OFF 1 ms (max.)

Load Inductance / Capacitance (max.)


Load Inductance / Capacitance (max.)

Load Inductance (max.) 0.5 Henry @ 4 Hz switch frequency, or:

Load Capacitance (max.) 50 μF

35010516 09/2020 339


140 DDO 353 00

Maintenance

Fuses
Fuses

Internal 5 A fuse for each group. (Part # 043502405) or equivalent). For the location
of the fuses see figure below.
External The internal fuse protects a group but not each output switch for all possible
overload conditions. The user must protect each point with a 3/4 A, 250 V
fuse.

CAUTION
OVER CURRENT TO OUTPUTS
Protect each point with a 3/4 A, 250 V fuse
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before accessing the fuses,
 Remove the power to the module (pre-actuators), and
 disconnect the terminal block.
 Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

340 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 353 00

Illustration
The following figure shows the fuse locations for the 140 DDO 353 00 module.

35010516 09/2020 341


140 DDO 353 00

140 DDO 353 00 Parameter Configuration

Parameter Configuration Window

Parameter and Default Values

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%M-0x) WORD (%MW-4X)
Output Starting 1 1
Address
Output Ending 32 2
Address
Output Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other than
in other than local) AUX1 local
AUX2
AUX3
Timeout State USERDEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE
Value 1, Value 2 0 0-65535 only if Timeout
State=USERDEFINED

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 49).

342 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DDO 353 01
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 34
140 DDO 353 01: 24 VDC 4x8 Source OUT Module

140 DDO 353 01: 24 VDC 4x8 Source OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDO 353 01 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 344
Indicators 345
Wiring Diagram 346
Specifications 348
Maintenance 350
140 DDO 353 01 Parameter Configuration 351

35010516 09/2020 343


140 DDO 353 01

Presentation

Function
The 140 DDO 353 01 source module switches 24 VDC powered loads, and is short circuit and
overload resistant.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDO 353 01 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

344 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 353 01

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDO 353 01 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDO 353 01 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red An error (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 345


140 DDO 353 01

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDO 353 01 wiring diagram.

346 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 353 01

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before accessing the fuses,
 Remove the power to the module (pre-actuators), and
 disconnect the terminal block.
 Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 347


140 DDO 353 01

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 32 OUT (4 groups x 8 points)


External Power 19.2 ... 30 VDC
Power Dissipation 5 W (all points ON)
Bus Current required (Module) 250 mA (max.)
I/O map 2 output word
Fault Detection Group indication: loss of field power.

Voltage
Voltage

Operating Voltage (max.) 19.2 ... 30 VDC


ON State Drop / Point 0.5 VDC @ 0.5 A

Maximum Load Current / Surge Current


Maximum Load Current / Surge Current

Each Point 0.5 A


Each Group 4A
Per Module 16 A
Surge Current (max.) 2 A each point (internally limited)
OFF State Leakage / Point < 0.1 mA @ 24 VDC

Isolation / Protection
Isolation / Protection

Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute


Output to Bus 500 VAC rms for 1 minute
Output Protection (internal) Thermal overload and short circuit.

348 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 353 01

Response (Resistive Loads)


Response (Resistive Loads)

OFF - ON < 0.1 ms


ON - OFF < 0.1 ms

Load Inductance / Capacitance (max.)


Load Inductance / Capacitance (max.)

Load Inductance (max.) 0.5 Henry @ 4 Hz switch frequency, or:

Load Capacitance (max.) 50 μF

35010516 09/2020 349


140 DDO 353 01

Maintenance

Fuses
Fuses

Internal 5 A fuse for each group. (Part # 043502405) or equivalent).


For the location of the fuses see figure below.
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before accessing the fuses,
 Remove the power to the module (pre-actuators), and
 disconnect the terminal block.
 Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Illustration
The following figure shows the fuse locations for the 140 DDO 353 00 module.

350 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 353 01

140 DDO 353 01 Parameter Configuration

Parameter Configuration Window

Parameter and Default Values

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%M-0x) WORD (%MW-4X)
Output Starting 1 1
Address
Output Ending 32 2
Address
Output Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other than
in other than local) AUX1 local
AUX2
AUX3
Timeout State USERDEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE
Value 1, Value 2 0 0-65535 only if Timeout
State=USERDEFINED

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 49).

35010516 09/2020 351


140 DDO 353 01

352 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DDO 353 10
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 35
140 DDO 353 10: 24 VDC 4x8 Sink OUT Module

140 DDO 353 10: 24 VDC 4x8 Sink OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDO 353 10 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 354
Indicators 355
Wiring Diagram 356
Specifications 358
Maintenance 360
140 DDO 353 10 Parameter Configuration 362

35010516 09/2020 353


140 DDO 353 10

Presentation

Function
The 24 VDC Sink 4x8 Output module switches 24 VDC loads capable of driving displays, logic, and
other loads up to 500 mA with shared output common wired to positive potential, in the ON state.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDO 353 10 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

354 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 353 10

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDO 353 10 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDO 353 10 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red An error (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 355


140 DDO 353 10

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDO 353 10 wiring diagram.

356 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 353 10

CAUTION
OVER CURRENT TO OUTPUTS
Protect each point with a 3/4 A, 250 V fuse.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 357


140 DDO 353 10

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 32 OUT (4 groups x 8 points)


Logic True Low
External Power 19.2 ... 30 VDC
Power Dissipation 2.0 W + (0.4 V x Total load Current)
Bus Current required (Module) 330 mA (max.)
I/O map 2 output word
Fault Detection Blown fuse detect, loss of field power.

Voltage
Voltage

Operating Voltage (max.) 19.2 ... 30 VDC


1.0 ms 50 VDC decaying pulse
ON State Drop / Point 0.4 VDC @ 0.5 A

Maximum Load Current / Surge Current


Maximum Load Current / Surge Current

Each Point 0.5 A


Each Group 4A
Per Module 16 A
Surge Current (max.) 5 A @ 1 ms duration (no more than 6 per miute)
OFF State Leakage / Point 0.4 mA @ 30 VDC

Isolation / Protection
Isolation / Protection

Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute


Output to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute
Output Protection (internal) Transient voltage suppression: 36 V

358 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 353 10

Response (Resistive Loads)


Response (Resistive Loads)

OFF - ON 1 ms (max.)
ON - OFF 1 ms (max.)

Load Inductance / Capacitance (max.)


Load Inductance / Capacitance (max.)

Load Inductance (max.) 0.5 Henry @ 4 Hz switch frequency, or:

Load Capacitance (max.) 50 μF


Tungsten Load (max.) 12 W @ 24 V

35010516 09/2020 359


140 DDO 353 10

Maintenance

Fuses
Fuses

Internal 5 A fuse for each group. For the location of the fuses see figure below.
External The internal fuse protects a group but not each output switch for all possible overload
conditions. The user must protect each point with a 3/4 A, 250 V fuse.

CAUTION
DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS
Protect each point with a 3/4 A, 250 V fuse
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before accessing the fuses,
 Remove the power to the module (pre-actuators), and
 disconnect the terminal block.
 Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

360 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 353 10

Fuses Location Figure


The following figure shows the locations of the fuses for the 140 DDO 353 10 module.

35010516 09/2020 361


140 DDO 353 10

140 DDO 353 10 Parameter Configuration

Parameter Configuration Window

Parameter and Default Values

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%M-0x) WORD (%MW-4X)
Output Starting 1 1
Address
Output Ending 32 2
Address
Output Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to Mast if module
(Grayed if module AUX0 in other than local
in other than local) AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
Timeout State USERDEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE
Value 1, Value 2 0 0-65535 only enabled if Timeout
State=Userdefined

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 49).

362 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DDO 364 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 36
140 DDO 364 00: 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast OUT Module

140 DDO 364 00: 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDO 364 00 Module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 364
Indicators 367
140 DDO 364 00 Cable Color Codes 368
Specifications 369
140 DDO 364 00 Parameter Configuration 371

35010516 09/2020 363


140 DDO 364 00

Presentation

Function
The 140 DDO 364 00 module switches 24 VDC powered loads. Outputs are thermally protected.

364 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 364 00

Illustration
The front view of the 140 DDO 364 00 output module

35010516 09/2020 365


140 DDO 364 00

Recommended Cables
The following table shows recommended cables, description, and their length in meters.

Cable Part Number Description Length (M)


TSXCDP301 (1) HE 10 - flying leads 3
TSXCDP501 (1) HE 10 - flying leads 5
TSXCDP053 (2) HE 10 - round cable 0.5
TSXCDP103 (2) HE 10 - round cable 1
TSXCDP203 (2) HE 10 - round cable 2
TSXCDP303 (2) HE 10 - round cable 3
TSXCDP503 (2) HE 10 - round cable 5

Compatible Output Adapter Sub-Bases


The following tables shows the compatible output adapter sub-bases..

Channels Type
8 ABE-7S08S2xx1
8 ABE-7R08Sxxx/7P08T3301
16 ABE-7R16Sxxx
16 ABE-7R16Txxx/7P16Txxx
1
With the splitter sub-base ABE-7ACC02

366 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 364 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDO 364 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDO 364 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Act Green Bus communication is present.
F Red Group power missing, short circuit or overload.
+32 Green Points 33 to 64 displayed on LED matrix.
+64 Green Points 65 to 96 displayed on LED matrix.

Pushbutton
Use the pushbutton to select output points to be displayed as per the following table:

LED +32 +64


Out 1 to 32 Off Off
Out 33 to 64 On Off
Out 65 to 96 Off On

35010516 09/2020 367


140 DDO 364 00

140 DDO 364 00 Cable Color Codes

Cable Color Codes for all Groups

1. White 2. Brown
3. Green 4. Yellow
5. Gray 6. Pink
7. Blue 8. Red
9. Black 10. Purple
11. Gray/pink 12 Red/blue
13. White/green 14. Brown/green
15. White/yellow 16. Yellow/brown
17. White/gray 18. Gray/brown
19. White/pink 20. Pink/brown

368 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 364 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 96 OUT (6 groups x 16 points)


External Power 19.2 ... 30 VDC 19.2 A max. (determined by load)
Power Dissipation 7.0 W
Bus Current required (Module) 250 mA (max.)
I/O map 6 output word
Fault Detection Group indication about loss of field power, short
circuit or overload.

Voltage
Voltage

Operating Voltage (max.) 19.2 ... 30 VDC


ON State Drop / Point 0.5 VDC @ 0.5 A

Maximum Load Current / Surge Current


Maximum Load Current / Surge Current

Each Point 0.5 A


Each Group 3.2 A
Per Module 19.2 A
Surge Current (max.) 2 A each point (internally limited)
OFF State Leakage / Point < 1 mA @ 24 VDC

Isolation / Protection
Isolation / Protection

Output to Bus 500 VAC rms for 1 minute


Output Protection (internal) Thermal overload and short circuit

Response (Resistive Loads)


Response (Resistive Loads)

OFF - ON < 1 ms
ON - OFF < 1 ms

35010516 09/2020 369


140 DDO 364 00

Load Inductance / Capacitance (max.)


Load Inductance / Capacitance (max.)

Load Inductance (max.) 0.5 Henry @ 4 Hz switch frequency, or:

Load Capacitance (max.) 50 μF

Fuses
Fuses

Internal -
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

370 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 364 00

140 DDO 364 00 Parameter Configuration

Parameter Configuration Window

Parameter and Default Values

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping Discrete WORD (%MW-4X)
Outputs Starting 1 1
Address
Outputs Ending 96 6
Address
Output Type BINARY –
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if module in other than
(Grayed if module AUX0 local
in other than local) AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE
Value 1, Value 2,... 0 0-65535 only enabled if Timeout State=USER
DEFINED

35010516 09/2020 371


140 DDO 364 00

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 50).

372 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DDO 843 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 37
140 DDO 843 00: 10 ... 60 VDC 2x8 Source OUT Module

140 DDO 843 00: 10 ... 60 VDC 2x8 Source OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDO 843 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 374
Indicators 375
Wiring Diagram 376
Specifications 378
Maintenance 380
140 DDO 843 00 Parameter Configuration 382

35010516 09/2020 373


140 DDO 843 00

Presentation

Function
The DC Output 10 ... 60 VDC 2x8 Source module switches 10 ... 60 VDC powered loads and is for
use with shared ouput common wired to 0 V. External power supplies may be mixed between
groups.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDO 843 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

374 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 843 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDO 843 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDO 843 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
1 ... 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 375


140 DDO 843 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDO 843 00 wiring diagram.

NOTE: N / C = Not Connected


NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.

376 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 843 00

If GROUP A SUPPLY or GROUP B SUPPLY are supplied and GROUP A COMMON or GROUP
B COMMON are not connected, the state of the digital output channels of the corresponding group
can be “1”, regardless of the state specified via the user program.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
 Ensure that GROUP A COMMON and GROUP B COMMON are always properly connected.
 Verify that the terminals for GROUP A COMMON and GROUP B COMMON are tightened with
the tightening torque of 7.0 N.m.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Each output group is equipped with an internal, replaceable 8 A fuse (250 V, 5x20 mm, Time
Delay/Slow Blow).
The individual outputs must be fused separately.

CAUTION
INCORRECT OR MISSING FUSING
Provide a separate, external 2 A fuse for each individual output.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 377


140 DDO 843 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 16 OUT (2 groups x 8 points)


Logic True High
External Power 10 ... 60 VDC
Power Dissipation 1.0 W + 1 V x Total module load Current
Bus Current required (Module) 160 mA (max.)
I/O map 1 output word

Voltage
Voltage

Operating Voltage (max.) 10.2 ... 72 VDC


Absolute Maximum Voltage 72 VDC (continuous)
ON State Drop / Point 1 VDC @ 2 A

Maximum Load Current / Surge Current


Maximum Load Current / Surge Current

Each Point 2A
Each Group 6A
Per Module 12 A
Surge Current (max.) 7.5 A @ 50 ms duration (no more than 20 per minute)
each point
OFF State Leakage / Point 1 mA @ 60 VDC

Isolation / Protection
Isolation / Protection

Group to Group 700 VDC for 1 minute


Group to Bus 2500 VDC for 1 minute
Output Protection (internal) Over voltage (suppression diode)

378 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 843 00

Response (Resistive Loads)


Response (Resistive Loads)

OFF - ON 1 ms
ON - OFF 1 ms

35010516 09/2020 379


140 DDO 843 00

Maintenance

Fuses
Fuses

Internal 8A fuse time-lag for each group.


External The internal fuse protects a group but not each output switch for all possible overload
conditions. The user must protect each point with a 2 A, 250V, fast-acting fuse

CAUTION
DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS
Protect each point with a 2 A, 250V, fast-acting fuse
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before accessing the fuses,
 Remove the power to the module (pre-actuators), and
 disconnect the terminal block.
 Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

380 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 843 00

Illustration
The following figure shows fuse locations for the 140 DDO 843 00 module.

35010516 09/2020 381


140 DDO 843 00

140 DDO 843 00 Parameter Configuration

Parameter Configuration Window

Parameter and Default Values

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%M-0x) WORD (%MW-4X)
Outputs Starting 1 1
Address
Outputs Ending 16 1
Address
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other than
in other than local) AUX1 local
AUX2
AUX3
Output Type BINARY BCD
Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE
Value 0 0-65535 only enabled if Timeout
State=USER
DEFINED

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 47).

382 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DDO 885 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 38
140 DDO 885 00: 24 ... 125 VDC 2x6 Source OUT Module

140 DDO 885 00: 24 ... 125 VDC 2x6 Source OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDO 885 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 384
Indicators 385
Wiring Diagram 386
Specifications 388
Maintenance 391
140 DDO 885 00 Parameter Configuration 393

35010516 09/2020 383


140 DDO 885 00

Presentation

Function
The DC Output 24 ... 125 VDC 2x6 Source module switches 24 ... 125 VDC powered loads and is
for use with shared ouput common wired to 0 V.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDO 885 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

384 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 885 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDO 885 00 module with status
indication.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDO 885 00 module

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red An over current condition on any point has been
detected.
1 ... 12 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.
1 ... 12 Red The indicated output point has an over current
condition.

NOTE: To clear an error indication, the point must be commanded OFF in user logic.

35010516 09/2020 385


140 DDO 885 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDO 885 00 wiring diagram.

386 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 885 00

CAUTION
DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS
This module is not protected against reverse polarity. Follow these precautions to avoid
equipment damage:
 Do not reverse the polarity of the field power supply.
 To help protect the module against polarity miswiring, add an external diode in series with
each group supply line. This diode must be able to support the group load current.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

NOTE: N / C = Not Connected.


NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 387


140 DDO 885 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 12 OUT (2 groups x 6 points)


External Power None
Power Dissipation 1.0 W + 0.77 W x points ON
Bus Current required 6 points ON: 375 mA
12 points ON: 650 mA
I/O map 1 input word
1 output word
Fault Detection Over Current (see note below)

Voltage
Voltage

Operating Voltage (max.) 19.2 ... 156.2 VDC including ripple


ON State Drop / Point 0.75 VDC @ 0.5 A

Maximum Load Current / Surge Current


Maximum Load Current / Surge Current

Each Point 0.75 A < 40 degrees C (see the operating curve)


Each Group 3 A, 0 ... 60 degrees C
Per Module 6 A, 0 ... 60 degrees C
Surge Current (max.) 4 A @1 ms duration (no more than 6 per minute)
Peak Load Current 4 A for T ≤ 1 ms
OFF State Leakage / Point 0.5 mA @ 150 VDC

388 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 885 00

NOTE: Each group: 3 A, 0 ... 60 degrees C. Per module: 6 A, 0 ... 60 degrees C

Maximum Tungsten
Maximum Tungsten

@ 130 VDC 46 W per point


@ 115 VDC 41 W per point
@ 24 VDC 8 W per point

Inductance and Switching Frequency


Inductance and Switching Frequency

Inductance Internal Diode protected, no limit on Inductance


Switching Frequency 50 Hz (max.)

Isolation / Protection
Isolation / Protection

Field to Bus 2500 VAC rms for 1 minute


Group to Group 1200 VAC rms for 1 minute
Output Protection (internal) Group varistor and individual point over Current
sense

35010516 09/2020 389


140 DDO 885 00

Response (Resistive Loads)


Response (Resistive Loads)

OFF - ON 1 ms
ON - OFF 1 ms

NOTE: Each output point is protected by an over current sense circuit. When an over current
condition is detected, the point is turned OFF, its LED fault indicator is turned ON, and the
appropriate bit is set in the module fault register.
The output point will be turned OFF after a short is detected. A fault greater than 9.4 A will
guarantee that the point will be turned OFF and will latch the output point in the OFF state. To clear
a fault, the point must be commanded OFF in user logic.

390 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 885 00

Maintenance

Fuses
Fuses

Internal 4 A for 3 outputs, 250 V (See figure below for the location of the fuses.)
External Required to protect each output.

CAUTION
DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS
Protect each output with a 1 A, 250 V fuse.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before accessing the fuses:
 remove the power to the module (pre-actuators).
 disconnect the terminal block
 Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
that the power is off
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

35010516 09/2020 391


140 DDO 885 00

Illustration
The following figure shows the fuse locations for the 140 DDO 885 00 module.

392 35010516 09/2020


140 DDO 885 00

140 DDO 885 00 Parameter Configuration

Parameter Configuration Window

Parameter and Default Values

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1X%M-0X) WORD (%IW-3X%MW-4X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 16 1
Address
Outputs Starting 1 1
Address
Outputs Ending 16 1
Address
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if module in other than local
(Grayed if AUX0
module in other AUX1
than local) AUX2
AUX3
Input Type BINARY BCD
Output Type BINARY BCD
Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE
Value 0 0-65535 only enabled if Timeout State=USER DEFINED

35010516 09/2020 393


140 DDO 885 00

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 46).

394 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DAO 840 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 39
140 DAO 840 00: 24 ... 230 VAC 16x1 OUT Module

140 DAO 840 00: 24 ... 230 VAC 16x1 OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAO 840 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 396
Indicators 397
Wiring Diagram 398
Specifications 401
140 DAO 840 00 Parameter Configuration 404

35010516 09/2020 395


140 DAO 840 00

Presentation

Function
The AC Output 24 ... 230 VAC 16x1 module switches 24 ... 230 VAC powered loads.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAO 840 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

396 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 840 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAO 840 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAO 840 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red An error (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.
1 ... 16 Red There is an error on the indicated point or channel.

35010516 09/2020 397


140 DAO 840 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAO 840 00 wiring diagram.

1. This module is not polarity sensitive.


2. N / C = Not Connected.
3. Voltages up to 133V may be different phases on adjacent output points.
4. Voltages over 133V of different phases must have an output point separation between them. For example:
Output 1 and 2 - Phase A, Skip Output 3, Output 4 - Phase B.
5. When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG or 2-16 AWG;
the minimum size is 20 AWG.

398 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 840 00

NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before accessing the fuses,
 Remove the power to the module (pre-actuators), and
 disconnect the terminal block.
 Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Protect each output point with an external fuse. Schneider Electric recommends a 5 A fuse with
an I2T rating of less than 87.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION
DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS
 Ensure that the AC power energizing each group is from a common, single-phase AC power
source.
 Protect the module output when an external switch is used to control an inductive load in
parallel with the module output. Use an external varistor (Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent) in
parallel with the switch.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 399


140 DAO 840 00

NOTE:
The output protection is composed of an RC filter (snubber filter) and a varistor:
 The snubber filter is optional. The values of R and C are not provided as they depend on the
device used.
 Choose the varistor with appropriate electronic characteristics depending on the voltage
required by the device used.

400 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 840 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 16 OUT isolated


External Power Not required for this module
Power Dissipation 1.85 W + 1.1 V x Total module load Currents
Bus Current required (Module) 350 mA
I/O map 1 output words

Absolute Maximum Input


Absolute Maximum Input

10 s 300 VAC
1 Cycle 400 VAC

Voltage
Voltage

Operating Voltage (max.) 20 ... 253 VAC


ON State Drop / Point 1.5 VAC

Maximum Load Current


Maximum Load Current

Each Point 24 to 115 VAC, 4 Amps per output


200 to 230 VAC, 3 Amps per output
Any four contiguous Points 4.0 A max. continuous for the sum of the four
points.
Per Module 16 A continuous (see chart below)

35010516 09/2020 401


140 DAO 840 00

The following figure shows the 140 DAO 840 00 operating curve.

Frequency and Minimum Load Current


Frequency and Minimum Load Current

Frequency 47 ... 63 Hz
Minimum Load Current 5 mA

OFF State Leakage / Point (max.)


OFF State Leakage / Point (max.)

OFF State Leakage / Point (max.) 2.5 mA @ 230 VAC


2 mA @ 115 VAC
1 mA @ 48 VAC
1 mA @ 24 VAC

Surge Current (max. rms)


Surge Current (max. rms)

One Cycle 30 A per point


Two Cycles 20 A per point
Three Cycles 10 A per point
Applied DV/DT 400 V / μs

402 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 840 00

Isolation / Protection
Isolation / Protection

Output to Output 1500 VAC rms for 1 minute


Output to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute
Output Protection (internal) RC snubber suppression

Response
Response

OFF - ON 0.5 of one line cycle max.


ON - OFF 0.5 of one line cycle max.

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External Protect each output with an external 5 amp fuse with
an I2T rating of less than 87.

CAUTION
OVER CURRENT TO OUTPUTS
Protect each point with a 5 A, 250 V fuse
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 403


140 DAO 840 00

140 DAO 840 00 Parameter Configuration

Parameter Configuration Window

Parameter and Default Values

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%M-0x) WORD (%MW-4X)
Output Starting 1 1
Address
Output Ending 16 1
Address
Output Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other than
in other than local) AUX1 local
AUX2
AUX3
Timeout State USERDEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE
Value 0 0-65535 only enabled if Timeout
State=USERDEFINED

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 47).

404 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DAO 840 10
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 40
140 DAO 840 10: 24 ... 115 VAC 16x1 OUT Module

140 DAO 840 10: 24 ... 115 VAC 16x1 OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information of the Quantum 140 DAO 840 10 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 406
Indicators 407
Wiring Diagram 408
Specifications 411
140 DAO 840 10 Parameter Configuration 414

35010516 09/2020 405


140 DAO 840 10

Presentation

Function
The AC Output 24 ... 115 VAC 16x1 module switches 24 ... 115 VAC powered loads.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAO 840 10 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

406 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 840 10

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAO 840 10 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAO 840 10 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red An error (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.
1 ... 16 Red There is an error on the indicated point or channel.

35010516 09/2020 407


140 DAO 840 10

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAO 840 10 wiring diagram.

1. This module is not polarity sensitive.


2. N / C = Not Connected.
3. When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG or 2-16 AWG;
the minimum size is 20 AWG.

408 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 840 10

NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before accessing the fuses,
 Remove the power to the module (pre-actuators), and
 disconnect the terminal block.
 Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS
Protect each output with an external 5 A fuse with an I2T rating of less than 87.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

CAUTION
DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS
 Ensure that the AC power energizing each group is from a common, single-phase AC power
source.
 Protect the module output when an external switch is used to control an inductive load in
parallel with the module output. Use an external varistor (Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent) in
parallel with the switch.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 409


140 DAO 840 10

NOTE:
The output protection is composed of an RC filter (snubber filter) and a varistor:
 The snubber filter is optional. The values of R and C are not provided as they depend on the
device used.
 Choose the varistor with appropriate electronic characteristics depending on the voltage
required by the device used.

410 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 840 10

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 16 OUT isolated


External Power Not required for this module
Power Dissipation 1.85 W + 1.1 V x Total module load Currents
Bus Current required (Module) 350 mA
I/O map 1 output word

Absolute Maximum Input


Absolute Maximum Input

10 s 156 VAC
1 Cycle 200 VAC

Voltage
Voltage

Operating Voltage (max.) 20 ... 132 VAC


ON State Drop / Point 1.5 VAC

Maximum Load Current


Maximum Load Current

Each Point 4.0 A continuous, 20 ... 132 VAC rms


Any four contiguous Points 4.0 A max. continuous for the sum of the four
points.
Per Module 16 A continuous (see the chart below)

35010516 09/2020 411


140 DAO 840 10

The following figure shows the 140 DAO 840 10 operating curve.

Frequency and Minimum Load Current

Frequency 47 ... 63 Hz
Minimum Load Current 5 mA

OFF State Leakage / Point (max.)


OFF State Leakage / Point (max.)

OFF State Leakage / Point (max.) 2.5 mA @ 230 VAC


2 mA @ 115 VAC
1 mA @ 48 VAC
1 mA @ 24 VAC

Surge Current (max. rms)


Surge Current (max. rms)

One Cycle 30 A per point


Two Cycles 20 A per point
Three Cycles 10 A per point
Applied dV/dT 400 V / μs

412 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 840 10

Isolation / Protection
Isolation / Protection

Output to Output 1500 VAC rms for 1 minute


Output to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute
Output Protection (internal) RC snubber suppression

Response
Response

OFF - ON 0.5 of one line cycle max.


ON - OFF 0.5 of one line cycle max.

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External Protect each output with an external 5 A fuse with
an I2T rating of less than 87.

CAUTION
OVER CURRENT TO OUTPUTS
Protect each point with an external 5 A, 250 V fuse with an I2T rating of less than 87..
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 413


140 DAO 840 10

140 DAO 840 10 Parameter Configuration

Parameter Configuration Window

Parameter and Default Values

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%M-0x) WORD (%MW-4X)
Output Starting 1 1
Address
Output Ending 16 1
Address
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module in AUX0 module in other than
other than local) AUX1 local
AUX2
AUX3
Output Type BINARY BCD
Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE
Value 0 0-65535 only enabled if
Timeout State=USER
DEFINED

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 47).

414 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DAO 842 10
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 41
140 DAO 842 10: 100 ... 230 VAC 4x4 OUT Module

140 DAO 842 10: 100 ... 230 VAC 4x4 OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAO 842 10 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 416
Indicators 417
Wiring Diagram 418
Specifications 420
Maintenance 423
140 DAO 842 10 Parameter Configuration 425

35010516 09/2020 415


140 DAO 842 10

Presentation

Function
The AC Output 100 ... 230 VAC 4x4 module switches 100 ... 230 VAC powered loads.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAO 842 10 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

416 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 842 10

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAO 842 10 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAO 842 10 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red A fault (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.
1 ... 4 Red The indicated group has a blown fuse or no field
5 ... 8 power.
9 ... 12
13 ... 16

35010516 09/2020 417


140 DAO 842 10

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 DAO 842 10 module.

1. N / C = Not Connected
2. This module is not polarity sensitive.
3. When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG or 2-16 AWG;
the minimum size is 20 AWG.

418 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 842 10

NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

CAUTION
MODULE OUTPUT DAMAGE
 Ensure that the AC power energizing each group is from a common, single-phase AC power
source.
 Protect the module output when an external switch is used to control an inductive load in
parallel with the module output. Use an external varistor (Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent) in
parallel with the switch.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

NOTE:
The output protection is composed of an RC filter (snubber filter) and a varistor:
 The snubber filter is optional. The values of R and C are not provided as they depend on the
device used.
 Choose the varistor with appropriate electronic characteristics depending on the voltage
required by the device used.

35010516 09/2020 419


140 DAO 842 10

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 16 OUT (4 groups x 4 points)


External Power 85 ... 253 VAC
Power Dissipation 1.85 W + 1.1 V x Total module load Currents
Bus Current required (Module) 350 mA
I/O map 1 output words
Fault Detection Blown fuse detect, loss of field power

Absolute Maximum Input


Absolute Maximum Input

10 s 300 VAC
1 Cycle 400 VAC

Voltage
Voltage

Operating Voltage (max.) 85 ... 253 VAC


ON State Drop / Point 1.5 VAC

420 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 842 10

Maximum Load Current


Maximum Load Current

Each Point 4.0 A continuous, 85 ... 132 VAC rms


3.0 A continuous, 170 ... 253 VAC rms
Each Group 4.0 A continuous
Per Module 16 A continuous (see the chart below)

The following figure shows the 140 DAO 842 10 Operating Curve.

Frequency and Minimum Load Current

Frequency 47 ... 63 Hz
Minimum Load Current 5 mA

35010516 09/2020 421


140 DAO 842 10

OFF State Leakage / Point (max.)


OFF State Leakage / Point (max.)

OFF State Leakage / Point (max.) 2.5 mA @ 230 VAC


2 mA @ 115 VAC

Surge Current (max. rms)


Surge Current (max. rms)

One Cycle 30 A per point, 45 A per group


Two Cycles 20 A per point, 30 A per group
Three Cycles 10 A per point, 25 A per group
Applied dV/dT 400 V / μs

Isolation / Protection
Isolation / Protection

Group to Group 1000 VAC rms for 1 minute, galvanically isolated


Output to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute
Output Protection (internal) RC snubber suppression

Response
Response

OFF - ON 0.5 of one line cycle max.


ON - OFF 0.5 of one line cycle max.

422 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 842 10

Maintenance

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External Protect each output point with an external fuse. Schneider Electric
recommends a 5 A fuse with an T rating of less than 87.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before accessing the fuses,
 Remove the power to the module (pre-actuators), and
 disconnect the terminal block.
 Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
OVER CURRENT TO OUPUTS
Protect each point with a 5 A, 250 V fuse.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 423


140 DAO 842 10

Illustration
The following figure shows the fuse locations for the 140 DAO 842 10 module.

424 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 842 10

140 DAO 842 10 Parameter Configuration

Parameter Configuration Window

Parameter and Default Values

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%M-0x) WORD (%MW-4X)
Outputs Starting 1 1
Address
Outputs Ending 16 1
Address
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other than
in other than local) AUX1 local
AUX2
AUX3
Output Type BINARY BCD
Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE
Value 0 0-65535 only enabled if Timeout
State=USER
DEFINED

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 47).

35010516 09/2020 425


140 DAO 842 10

426 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DAO 842 20
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 42
140 DAO 842 20: 24 ... 48 VAC 4x4 OUT Module

140 DAO 842 20: 24 ... 48 VAC 4x4 OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAO 842 20 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 428
Indicators 429
Wiring Diagram 430
Specifications 432
Maintenance 435
140 DAO 842 20 Parameter Configuration 436

35010516 09/2020 427


140 DAO 842 20

Presentation

Function
The AC Output 24 ... 48 VAC 4x4 module switches 24 ... 48 VAC powered loads.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAO 842 20 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

428 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 842 20

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAO 842 20 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAO 842 20 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red A fault (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.
1 ... 4 Red The indicated group has a blown fuse or no field
5 ... 8 power.
9 ... 12
13 ... 16

35010516 09/2020 429


140 DAO 842 20

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAO 842 20 wiring diagram.

1. N / C = Not Connected
2. This module is not polarity sensitive.
3. When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG or 2-16 AWG;
the minimum size is 20 AWG.

430 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 842 20

NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

CAUTION
DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS
 Ensure that the AC power energizing each group is from a common, single-phase AC power
source.
 Protect the module output when an external switch is used to control an inductive load in
parallel with the module output. Use an external varistor (Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent) in
parallel with the switch.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

NOTE:
The output protection is composed of an RC filter (snubber filter) and a varistor:
 The snubber filter is optional. The values of R and C are not provided as they depend on the
device used.
 Choose the varistor with appropriate electronic characteristics depending on the voltage
required by the device used.

35010516 09/2020 431


140 DAO 842 20

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 16 OUT (4 groups x 4 points)


External Power 20 ... 56 VAC
Power Dissipation 1.85 W + 1.1 V x Total module load Currents
Bus Current required (Module) 350 mA
I/O map 1 output words
Fault Detection Blown fuse detect, loss of field power

Absolute Maximum Input


Absolute Maximum Input

10 s 63 VAC
1 Cycle 100 VAC
1.3 ms 111 VAC peak

Voltage
Voltage

Operating Voltage (max.) 20 ... 56 VAC


ON State Drop / Point 1.5 VAC

432 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 842 20

Maximum Load Current


Maximum Load Current

Each Point 4.0 A continuous, 20 ... 56 VAC rms


Each Group 4.0 A continuous
Per Module 16 A continuous (see the chart below)

The following figure shows the 140 DAO 842 20 Operating Curve.

Frequency and Minimum Load Current

Frequency 47 ... 63 Hz
Minimum Load Current 5 mA

Surge Current (max. rms) / Leakage


Surge Current (max. rms) / Leakage

One Cycle 30 A per point, 45 A per group


Two Cycles 20 A per point, 30 A per group
Three Cycles 10 A per point, 25 A per group
Applied dV/dT 400 V / μs
OFF State Leakage / Point 1 mA max.

35010516 09/2020 433


140 DAO 842 20

Isolation / Protection
Isolation / Protection

Group to Group 1000 VAC rms for 1 minute, galvanically isolated


Output to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute
Output Protection (internal) RC snubber suppression

Response
Response

OFF - ON 0.5 of one line cycle max.


ON - OFF 0.5 of one line cycle max.

434 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 842 20

Maintenance

Fuses
Fuses

Internal 5 A fuse for each group. For the location of the fuses see the figure below.
External User installed per local and national electrical codes.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before accessing the fuses,
 Remove the power to the module (pre-actuators), and
 disconnect the terminal block.
 Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAO 842 20 fuse locations.

35010516 09/2020 435


140 DAO 842 20

140 DAO 842 20 Parameter Configuration

Parameter Configuration Window

Parameter and Default Values

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%M-0x) WORD (%MW-4X)
Outputs Starting 1 1
Address
Outputs Ending 16 1
Address
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other than
in other than local) AUX1 local
AUX2
AUX3
Output Type BINARY BCD
Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE
Value 0 0-65535 only enabled if Timeout
State=USER
DEFINED

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 47).

436 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DAO 853 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 43
140 DAO 853 00: 230 VAC 4x8 Source OUT Module

140 DAO 853 00: 230 VAC 4x8 Source OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAO 853 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 438
Indicators 439
Wiring Diagram 440
Specifications 442
Maintenance 445
140 DAO 853 00 Parameter Configuration 446

35010516 09/2020 437


140 DAO 853 00

Presentation

Function
The AC Output 230 VAC 4x8 module accepts 230 VAC powered loads.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAO 853 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

438 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 853 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAO 853 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAO 853 00 modul.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
1 ... 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 439


140 DAO 853 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAO 853 00 wiring diagram.

1. N / C = Not Connected
2. When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG or 2-16 AWG;
the minimum size is 20 AWG.

440 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 853 00

NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

CAUTION
DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS
 Ensure that the AC power energizing each group is from a common, single-phase AC power
source.
 Protect the module output when an external switch is used to control an inductive load in
parallel with the module output. Use an external varistor (Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent) in
parallel with the switch.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

NOTE:
The output protection is composed of an RC filter (snubber filter) and a varistor:
 The snubber filter is optional. The values of R and C are not provided as they depend on the
device used.
 Choose the varistor with appropriate electronic characteristics depending on the voltage
required by the device used.

35010516 09/2020 441


140 DAO 853 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 32 OUT (4 groups x 8 points)


Logic True High
External Power Not required for this module
Power Dissipation 1.60 W + 1.0 V x Total module load Currents
Bus Current required (Module) 320 mA
I/O map 2 output words

Absolute Maximum Input


Absolute Maximum Input

10 s 300 VAC
1 Cycle 400 VAC

Voltage
Voltage

Operating Voltage (max.) 20 ... 253 VAC


ON State Drop / Point 1.5 VAC

442 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 853 00

Maximum Load Current


Maximum Load Current

Each Point 1.0 A continuous, 20 ... 253 VAC rms


Each Group 4.0 A (max.)
Per Module 16 A continuous (see chart below)

The following figure shows the 140 DAO 853 00 Operating Curve.

Frequency and Minimum Load Current

Frequency 47 ... 63 Hz
Minimum Load Current 30 mA

OFF State Leakage / Point (max.)


OFF State Leakage / Point (max.)

OFF State Leakage / Point (max.) 0.88 mA @ 230 VAC


0.44 mA @ 115 VAC
0.18 mA @ 48 VAC
0.06 mA @ 24 VAC

35010516 09/2020 443


140 DAO 853 00

Surge Current (max. rms)


Surge Current (max. rms)

One Cycle 30 A per point


Two Cycles 20 A per point
Three Cycles 10 A per point
Applied dV/dT 400 V / μs

Isolation / Protection
Isolation / Protection

Group to Group 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute


Output to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute
Output Protection (internal) RC snubber protection

Response
Response

OFF - ON 0.5 of one line cycle max.


ON - OFF 0.5 of one line cycle max.

444 35010516 09/2020


140 DAO 853 00

Maintenance

Fuses
Fuses

Internal 4 A, 250 V fuse. For location of fuses see below


External User installed per local and national electrical codes

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before accessing the fuses,
 Remove the power to the module (pre-actuators), and
 disconnect the terminal block.
 Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Illustration
The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DAO 853 00 module.

35010516 09/2020 445


140 DAO 853 00

140 DAO 853 00 Parameter Configuration

Parameter Configuration Window

Parameter and Default Values

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%M-0x) WORD (%MW-4X)
Output Starting 1 1
Address
Output Ending 32 2
Address
Output Type BINARY BCD
Task Mast Fast fixed to Mast if module
(Grayed if module in other than local
in other than local)
Timeout State Userdefined Hold Last Value
Value 1, Value 2 0 0-65535 only if Timeout
State=Userdefined

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 49).

446 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DRA 840 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 44
140 DRA 840 00: Relay 16x1 Normally Open OUT Module

140 DRA 840 00: Relay 16x1 Normally Open OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DRA 840 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 448
Indicators 449
Wiring Diagram 450
Specifications 452
140 DRA 840 00 Parameter Configuration 454

35010516 09/2020 447


140 DRA 840 00

Presentation

Function
The Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open module is used to switch a voltage source using 16 relays
with normally open contacts.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DRA 840 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

448 35010516 09/2020


140 DRA 840 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DRA 840 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DRA 840 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
1 ... 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 449


140 DRA 840 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DRA 840 00 wiring diagram.

See Note

RELAY 1 COMMON
OUTPUT 1 + VOLTAGE -
2 1
SOURCE
LOAD
RELAY 2 COMMON 4 3 OUTPUT 2

RELAY 3 COMMON 6 5 OUTPUT 3

RELAY 4 COMMON 8 7 OUTPUT 4

N/C 10 9 N/C

RELAY 5 COMMON 12 11 OUTPUT 5

RELAY 6 COMMON 14 13 OUTPUT 6

RELAY 7 COMMON 16 15 OUTPUT 7

RELAY 8 COMMON 18 17 OUTPUT 8

N/C 20 19 N/C

RELAY 9 COMMON 22 21 OUTPUT 9

RELAY 10 COMMON 24 23 OUTPUT 10

RELAY 11 COMMON OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT X


26 25 N.O.
N.O.
RELAY 12 COMMON OUTPUT 12
28 27

N/C 30 29 N/C N.C.


RELAY 13 COMMON RELAY X
32 31 OUTPUT 13
COMMON
RELAY 14 COMMON OUTPUT 14 One of 16 Typical
34 33
RELAY 15 COMMON OUTPUT 15
36 35

RELAY 16 COMMON OUTPUT 16


38 37

N/C 40 39 N/C

450 35010516 09/2020


140 DRA 840 00

Notes on Wiring Diagram

 For 125 VDC inductive loads, external clamping is recommended to extend relay contact life.
(1N 4004 or equivalent).
 N / C = Not Connected.
 N.O. = Normally Open.
 N.C. = Normally Closed.
NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 451


140 DRA 840 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 16 OUT (normaly open)


External Power Not required for this module
Power Dissipation 5.5 W + 0.5 W x input points ON
Bus Current required (Module) 1100 mA
I/O map 1 output word

Operating Voltage
Operating Voltage

AC 20 ... 250 VAC


DC 5 ... 30 VDC
30 ... 150 VDC (reduced load Current)

Maximum Load Current


Maximum Load Current

Each Point 2 Amps per point maximum at 250 VAC, 30 VDC


at 60 deg C ambient.
1 A Tungsten lamp load
1 A @ a power factor of 0.4
1/8 hp @ 125 / 250 VAC
Each Point (30 ... 150 VDC) 300 mA (restive load)
100 mA (L/R = 10 msec)
Surge Current (max.) 10 A capacitive load @ t = 10 ms

Minimum Load Current


Minimum Load Current

Each Point 50 mA
Note: Minimum load Current if the contact is used
at rated loads of 5 ... 150 VDC or 20 ... 250 VDC
OFF State Leakage < 100 μA

452 35010516 09/2020


140 DRA 840 00

Isolation
Isolation

Output to Output 1780 VAC rms for one minute


Field to Bus 1780 VAC rms for one minute
2500 for one minute

Response
Response

OFF - ON 10 ms (max.)
ON - OFF 20 ms (max.)

Relay
Relay

Relay type Form A


Contact Protection Varistor 275 V (internal)
Mechanical Operations 10,000,000
Electrical Operations 200,000 (resistive load @ max. Voltage and
Current)
Electrical Operations (30 ... 150 VDC) 100,000 @ 300 mA (resistive load)
(see note below) 50,000 @ 500 mA (resistive load)
100,000 @ 100 mA (L/R = 10 msec)
100,000 Interposing Relay (Westinghouse Style
606B, Westinghouse type SG, Struthers Dunn 219
x 13 XP)
Switching Capability 500 VA (resistive load)

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

NOTE: Relay contact life for inductive loads may be significantly increased by using external
contact protection such as a clamping diode across the load.

35010516 09/2020 453


140 DRA 840 00

140 DRA 840 00 Parameter Configuration

Parameter Configuration Window

Parameter and Default Values

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%M-0x) WORD (%MW-4X)
Outputs Starting 1 1
Address
Outputs Ending 16 1
Address
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other than
in other than local) AUX1 local
AUX2
AUX3
Output Type BINARY BCD
Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE
Value 0 0-65535 only if Timeout
State=USER
DEFINED

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 47).

454 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DRC 830 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 45
140 DRC 830 00: Relay 8x1 Normally Open / Normally Closed OUT Module

140 DRC 830 00: Relay 8x1 Normally Open / Normally Closed
OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DRC 830 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 456
Indicators 457
Wiring Diagram 458
Specifications 460
140 DRC 830 00 Parameter Configuration 463

35010516 09/2020 455


140 DRC 830 00

Presentation

Function
The Relay Output 8x1 Normally Open / Normally Closed module is used to switch voltage sources
using eight relays with normally open and normally closed contacts.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DRC 830 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

456 35010516 09/2020


140 DRC 830 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DRC 830 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DRC 830 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red An error (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 8 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 457


140 DRC 830 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DRC 830 00 wiring diagram.

See Note

N.O. + VOLTAGE -
N/C 2 1
SOURCE
RELAY 1 COMMON LOAD
4 3 N.C.
See Note
N/C 6 5 N.O.

RELAY 2 COMMON N.C.


8 7
LOAD
N/C 10 9 N/C

12 11 OUTPUT 3
N/C

RELAY 3 COMMON OUTPUT 3


14 13
OUTPUT 4
N/C 16 15

OUTPUT 4
RELAY 4 COMMON 18 17

N/C 20 19 N/C

22 21 OUTPUT 5
N/C
RELAY 5 COMMON OUTPUT 5
24 23
OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT X
N/C 26 25 N.O. N.O.
RELAY 6 COMMON OUTPUT 6
28 27
N.C. OUTPUT X
N/C 30 29 N/C
N.C.
32 31 OUTPUT 7
N/C
RELAY 7 COMMON 34 33 OUTPUT 7
RELAY X
OUTPUT 8 COMMON
N/C 36 35

RELAY 8 COMMON OUTPUT 8 One of Eight Typical


38 37

N/C 40 39 N/C

458 35010516 09/2020


140 DRC 830 00

Notes on Wiring Diagram

 When switching DC voltages, it is recommended that the source be connected to the common
pin and the load be connected to the N.O. or N.C. contact.
 For 125 VDC inductive loads, external clamping is recommended to extend relay contact life (1N
4004 or equivalent).
 N / C = Not Connected.
 N.O. = Normally Open.
 N.C. - Normally Closed.
NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 459


140 DRC 830 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 8 OUT (Normally Open / Normally Closed)


External Power Not required for this module
Power Dissipation 2.75 W + 0.5 W x input points ON
Bus Current required (Module) 560 mA
I/O map 0.5 output word

Operating Voltage
Operating Voltage

AC 20 ... 250 VAC


DC 5 ... 30 VDC
30 ... 150 VDC (reduced load Current)

Maximum Load Current


Maximum Load Current

Each Point 2 A max. @ 250 VAC @ 60 degrees C ambient,


resistive load, 5A @ 40°C : see the derating curve
below
2 A Tungsten lamp load
3 A @ a power factor of 0.4
1/4 hp @ 125 / 250 VAC
Each Point (30 ... 150 VDC) 300 mA (restive load)
100 mA (L/R = 10 msec)
Maximum module Current 40 A (see the derating curve below)
Surge Current (max.) 20 A capacitive load @ t = 10 ms

460 35010516 09/2020


140 DRC 830 00

The following figure shows the relay derating curve.

Minimum Load Current


Minimum Load Current

Minimum Load Current 50 mA


Note: Minimum load Current if the contact is used
at rated loads of 5 ... 150 VDC or 20 ... 250 VAC
OFF State Leakage < 100 μA

Isolation
Isolation

Output to Output 1780 VAC rms for one minute


Field to Bus 1780 VAC rms for one minute
2500 for one minute

Response
Response

OFF - ON 10 ms (max.)
ON - OFF 20 ms (max.)

35010516 09/2020 461


140 DRC 830 00

Relay
Relay

Relay type Form C, NO / NC contacts


Contact Protection Varistor 275 V (internal)
Mechanical Operations 10,000,000
Electrical Operations 200,000 (resistive load @ max. Voltage and
Current)
Electrical Operations (30 ... 150 VDC) 100,000 @ 300 mA (resistive load)
(see note below) 50,000 @ 500 mA (resistive load)
100,000 @ 100 mA (L/R = 10 msec)
100,000 Interposing Relay (Westinghouse Style
606B, Westinghouse type SG, Struthers Dunn 219
x 13 XP)
Switching Capability 500 VA (reistive load)

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

NOTE: Relay contact life for inductive loads may be significantly increased by using external
contact protection such as a clamping diode across the load.

462 35010516 09/2020


140 DRC 830 00

140 DRC 830 00 Parameter Configuration

Parameter Configuration Window

Parameter and Default Values

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%M-0x) WORD (%MW-4X)
Outputs Starting 1 1
Address
Outputs Ending 8 1
Address
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other than
in other than local) AUX1 local
AUX2
AUX3
Output Type BINARY –
Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE
Value 0 0-65535 only if Timeout
State=USER
DEFINED

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 45).

35010516 09/2020 463


140 DRC 830 00

464 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DVO 853 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 46
140 DVO 853 00: 10 ... 30 VDC 32x1 Verified OUT Module

140 DVO 853 00: 10 ... 30 VDC 32x1 Verified OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DVO 853 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 466
Indicators 467
Wiring Diagram 468
Specifications 470
Maintenance 472
Addressing 473
Parameter Configuration 475

35010516 09/2020 465


140 DVO 853 00

Presentation

Function
The Quantum 140 DVO 853 00 is a 10 ... 30 VDC, 32 point output module with diagnostic
capability. The module will detect and report the output state sensed at the field connector and,
depending on the selected configuration, will verify that the output point is in the state commanded
by the PLC. The module is configured in four groups of eight outputs.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DVO 853 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

466 35010516 09/2020


140 DVO 853 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DVO 853 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DVO 853 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red An error (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 32 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 467


140 DVO 853 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DVO 853 00 wiring diagram.

NOTE: When field wiring the I/O module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.

468 35010516 09/2020


140 DVO 853 00

NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 469


140 DVO 853 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 32 OUT (4 groups x 8 points)


External Power 10 ... 30 VDC
Power Dissipation 2.5 W + 0.1 W x input points ON + 0.4 V x total load
Currents
Bus Current required (Module) 500 mA
I/O map 2 input word
2 output word
Fault Detection Blown fuse detect, loss of field power, incorrect
output state.

Voltage
Voltage

Operating Voltage (max.) 10 ... 30 VDC


Absolute Voltage (max.) 50 VDC for 1.0 ms decaying voltage pulse
ON State Drop / Point 0.4 VDC @ 0.5 A

Maximum Load Current


Maximum Load Current

Each Point 0.5 A


Each Group 4.0 A
Per Module 16 A
OFF State Leakage / Point 0.4 mA @ 30 VDC
Surge Current (max.) Each Point: 2.5 A @ 1 ms duration (no more than
6 per minute)

470 35010516 09/2020


140 DVO 853 00

Load Inductance / Capacitance (max.)


Load Inductance / Capacitance (max.)

Load Inductance (max.) 0.5 Henry @ 4 Hz switch frequency, or:

Load Capacitance (max.) 75 mF


Tungsten Load (max.) 2.5 W @ 10 VDC
3 W @ 12 VDC
6 W @ 24 VDC

Isolation / Protection
Isolation / Protection

Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute


Group to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute
Output Protection Transient Voltage Suppression (internal), overload
(short circuit) protecton

Response
Response

OFF - ON 1 ms (typical), 2 ms (max.)


ON - OFF 1 ms (typical), 2 ms (max.)

35010516 09/2020 471


140 DVO 853 00

Maintenance

Fuses
Fuses

Internal 5.0 Amp fuse per group


External If desired, a 3/4 A, 250 V fuse

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before accessing the fuses,
 Remove the power to the module (pre-actuators), and
 disconnect the terminal block.
 Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DVO 853 00 module Fuse Locations.

472 35010516 09/2020


140 DVO 853 00

Addressing

Flat Addressing
This module requires 32 contiguous, output references (%M) or 2 contiguous output words (%MW)
for output data and 32 contiguous, input references (%I) or 2 contiguous input words (%IW) for
verification input data. For a description of how to access the input points, please refer to Discrete
I/O Bit Numbering, page 34.
Output Words:

Input Words:

Topological Addressing
Topological addresses in Bit Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %I[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Input 2 %I[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Input 31 %I[\b.e\]r.m.31 Value
Input 32 %I[\b.e\]r.m.32 Value
Output 1 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Output 2 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Output 31 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.31 Value
Output 32 %Q[\b.e\]r.m.32 Value

35010516 09/2020 473


140 DVO 853 00

Topological addresses in Word Mapping format:

Point I/O Object Comment


Inputword 1 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Value
Inputword 2 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1.2 Value
Outputword 1 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Value
Outputword 2 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1.2 Value

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

I/O Map Status Byte


The eight bits in the I/O map status byte are used as follows:

The voltage error bit is set when the field supply is not present, or the group fuse is blown.
The miscompare bit is set when any point within the group does not match its commanded state.

474 35010516 09/2020


140 DVO 853 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x%M-0x) WORD (%MW-4X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 31 2
Address
Outputs Starting 1 1
Address
Outputs Ending 31 2
Address
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other than
in other than local) AUX1 local
AUX2
AUX3

35010516 09/2020 475


140 DVO 853 00

Name Default Value Options Description


Output Shutdown DISABLE FAILE STATES
State
Automatic Restart No Yes
Group_1
Status Input VERIFIED HEALTH VERIFIED FAULT
INPUT ONLY
ACTUAL
Fail States DISABLE LAST VALUE
USER DEFINED
User Defined 0 0-255 only enabled if Fail
States=USER
DEFINED
Group_2 see Group_1
Group_3
Group_4

476 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Discrete IN / OUT Modules
35010516 09/2020

Part VII
Discrete IN / OUT Modules

Discrete IN / OUT Modules

Introduction
The following part provides information on the Quantum Discrete IN / OUT modules.

What Is in This Part?


This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
47 General Information 479
48 140 DDM 390 00: 24 VDC 2x8 Sink IN / 2x4 Source OUT Module 481
49 140 DDM 690 00: 125 VDC High Power IN/OUT Module 493
50 140 DAM 590 00: 115 VAC 2x8 IN / 2x4 OUT Module 505

35010516 09/2020 477


Discrete IN / OUT Modules

478 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
General Information
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 47
General Information

General Information

Discrete I/O Logic Circuits

Discrete I/O True High Figure


The following figure shows true high/current sink input/current source output schematic.

Discrete I/O True Low Figure


The following figure shows true low/current source input/current sink output schematic.

35010516 09/2020 479


General Information

Current Sinking
This describes a physical implementation of the I/O hardware, which when in the true state, sinks
current from the external load.

Current Sourcing
This describes a physical implementation of the I/O hardware, which when in the true state,
sources current to the external load.

480 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DDM 390 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 48
140 DDM 390 00: 24 VDC 2x8 Sink IN / 2x4 Source OUT Module

140 DDM 390 00: 24 VDC 2x8 Sink IN / 2x4 Source OUT
Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDM 390 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 482
Indicators 483
RIO Drop Location 484
Wiring Diagram 485
Specifications 487
Maintenance 489
140 DDM 390 00 Parameter Configuration 491

35010516 09/2020 481


140 DDM 390 00

Presentation

Function
The DC Input 24 VDC 2x8 Sink / DC Output 24 VDC 2x4 Source module accepts and switches 24
VDC inputs/outputs and is for use with sink input and source output devices.

Illustration
This section contains a photograph of the front panel of the 140 DDM 390 00 module
The following figure shows the I/O module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

482 35010516 09/2020


140 DDM 390 00

Indicators

Version Label Figure


The following figure shows the location of the version label.

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDM 390 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDM 390 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red A fault (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 8 (left columns) Green The indicated output point and channel is turned ON.
1 ... 16 (right two columns) Green The indicated input point and channel is turned ON.

35010516 09/2020 483


140 DDM 390 00

RIO Drop Location

RIO Drop Location Figure


The following figure shows the RIO drop location.

NOTE: If the 140 DDM 390 00 module is used in a RIO drop, the 140 CRA 93X 00 RIO Drop must
be Version 1.04 at a minimum. Check the version label (see above) on the top front of the 140 CRA
93X 00 module and ensure that it is at the proper revision level

484 35010516 09/2020


140 DDM 390 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDM 390 00 wiring diagram.

1. N / C = Not Connected
2. When field wiring the I/O modules, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG or 2-16 AWG;
the minimum size is 20 AWG.

35010516 09/2020 485


140 DDM 390 00

NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before accessing the fuses,
 Remove the power to the module (pre-actuators), and
 Disconnect the terminal block.
 Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS
Protect each point with a 1.25 A fuse (Littlefuse 3121.25, 1.25 A, 250 V).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

486 35010516 09/2020


140 DDM 390 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 16 IN (2 groups x 8 points)


8 OUT (2 groups x 4 points)
External Power Not required for this module
Power Dissipation 1.75 W + 0.36 x input points ON + 1.1 V x total
outputs load Currents
Bus Current required (Module) 330 mA
I/O map 1 input word
0.5 output word
Fault Detection Input: None
Output: Blown fuse detect, loss of field power.

Input Rating
Input Rating

ON level voltage +15 ... +30 VDC


ON level current 2.0 mA (min.)
OFF leve voltage +3 ... +5 VDC
OFF level current 0.5 mA (max.)
Internal Resistance 2.5 kohm

Absolute Maximum Input


Absolute Maximum Input

Continuous 30 VAC
1.3 ms 56 VAC decaying pulse

Voltage (Output)
Voltage (Output)

Operating Voltage (max.) 19.2 ... 30 VDC


Absolute Voltage (max.) 56 VDC for 1.3 ms decaying voltage pulse
ON State Drop / Point 0.4 VDC @ 0.5 A

35010516 09/2020 487


140 DDM 390 00

Maximum Load Current


Maximum Load Current

Each Point 0.5 A


Each Group 2.0 A
Per Module 4A
OFF State Leakage / Point 0.4 mA @ 30 VDC
Surge Current (max.) Each Point: 5 A @ 500 ms duration (no more than
6 per minute)

Load Inductance / Capacitance (max.)


Load Inductance / Capacitance (max.)

Load Inductance (max.) 0.5 Henry @ 4 Hz switch frequency, or:

Load Capacitance (max.) 50 microF

Isolation
Isolation

Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute


Group to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute

Response (Input and Output)


Response (Input and Output)

OFF - ON 1 ms (max) - (resistive load output)


ON - OFF 1 ms (max) - (resistive load output)

Module Protection
Module Protection

Input Protection Resistor limited


Output Protection Transient Voltage Suppression (internal)

488 35010516 09/2020


140 DDM 390 00

Maintenance

Fuses
Fuses

Input Internal - None


External - User installed per local and national electrical codes
Output Internal - 5 A fuse for each group. For the location of the fuses, see figure below.
External - 1.25 A fuse (Littlefuse 3121.25, 1.25 A, 250 V).

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before accessing the fuses,
 Remove the power to the module (sensors and pre-actuators), and
 disconnect the terminal block.
 always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS
Protect each point with a 1.25 A, 250 V fuse.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 489


140 DDM 390 00

Illustration
The following figure shows the fuse locations of the 140 DDM 390 00 module.

490 35010516 09/2020


140 DDM 390 00

140 DDM 390 00 Parameter Configuration

Parameter Configuration Window

Parameter and Default Values

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x%M- WORD (%IW-
0x) 3x%MW-4X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 16 1
Address
Outputs Starting 1 1
Address
Outputs Ending 8 1
Address
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if module in other than local
(Grayed if AUX0
module in other AUX1
than local) AUX2
AUX3
Input Type BINARY BCD
Output Type BINARY BCD
Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE
Value 0 0-65535 only enabled if Timeout State=USER DEFINED

35010516 09/2020 491


140 DDM 390 00

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 54).

492 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DDM 690 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 49
140 DDM 690 00: 125 VDC High Power IN/OUT Module

140 DDM 690 00: 125 VDC High Power IN/OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DDM 690 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 494
Indicators 495
Wiring Diagram 497
Specifications 499
140 DDM 690 00 Parameter Configuration 502

35010516 09/2020 493


140 DDM 690 00

Presentation

Function
The 125 VDC High Power IN/OUT module provides four isolated outputs and four grouped inputs.
The outputs switch 24 to 125 VDC powered loads and are for use with sink and source devices.
The outputs also have short-circuit sense, indication, and shutdown circuitry. The inputs accept
125 VDC inputs and are for use with source output devices. The inputs have software-selectable
response times to provide additional input filtering.

Illustration
This section contains a photograph of the front panel of the 140 DDM 690 00 module
The following figure shows the I/O module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)
NOTE: The following information baselines minimum version levels that will support this module.

494 35010516 09/2020


140 DDM 690 00

Indicators

Version Levels Table


The following table shows the version levels for the Module Types.

Products Minimum Version Level (see User Action Required


label illustration below)
CPUs and NOMs < V02.20 Executive upgrade to ≥ V02.10
≥ V02.20 None
RIOs < V02.00 Module upgrade
≥ V02.00 and < V02.20 Executive upgrade to ≥ V01.10
≥ V02.20 None
DIOs < V02.10 Module upgrade
≥ V02.10 None

NOTE: The version label, see figure, is found on the top front of the module.

Version Label Figure


The following figure shows the version number location.

35010516 09/2020 495


140 DDM 690 00

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DDM 690 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DDM 690 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red Over current condition on any point.
1 ... 4 (left columns) Green The indicated output point is turned ON.
1 ... 4 (middle Red The indicated input point has an over current condition.
columns)
1 and 4 (right columns) Green The indicated input point is turned ON.

496 35010516 09/2020


140 DDM 690 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DDM 690 00 wiring diagram.

1. N / C = Not Connected.
2. Each output has two terminals for multiple wire connections.
3. When field wiring the I/O modules, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG or 2-16 AWG;
the minimum size is 20 AWG.

35010516 09/2020 497


140 DDM 690 00

NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Do not reverse polarities of the output points. Reverse polarity will turn an output point ON.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

498 35010516 09/2020


140 DDM 690 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 4 IN (4 groups x 1 point)


4 OUT isolated
External Power Not required for this module
Power Dissipation 0.4 W x (1.0) x number of input points ON + (0.75) x
total module outputs Currents
Bus Current required (Module) 350 mA
I/O map 1 input word
1 output word
Fault Detection Input: None
Over Current - each point

Input Rating
Input Rating

ON level voltage +88 ... +156 VDC including ripple


ON level current 2.0 mA (min.)
OFF leve voltage 0 ... +36 VDC
OFF level current 1.2 mA (max.)
Internal Resistance 24 kohms (nominal)
Absolute Voltage (max.) Continuous: 156.2 VDC including ripple

Input Response (OFF-ON, ON-OFF)


Input Response (OFF-ON, ON-OFF)

Default Filter 0.5 ms


Non-Default Filter 1.5 ms

Voltage (Output)
Voltage (Output)

Operating Voltage (max.) 19.2 ... 156.2 VDC including ripple


ON State Drop / Point 0.75 VDC @ 4 A

35010516 09/2020 499


140 DDM 690 00

Maximum Load Current


Maximum Load Current

Each Point 4 A continuous


Per Module 16 A continuous (see the derating curve)
OFF State Leakage / Point 1.2 mA @ 150 VDC
Surge Current (max.) Each Point: 30 A @ 500 ms duration
Output Response (OFF-ON, ON-OFF) 0.2 ms (max.) (resistive load output

The following figure shows the 140 DDM 690 00 Derating Curve.

Load Inductance / Capacitance (max.)


Load Inductance / Capacitance (max.)

Load Inductance (max.) For switching intervals ≥ 15 seconds


per ANSI/IEEE C37.90- 1978/1989):

For repetitive switching:

where: L = Load Inductance (Henry). I = Load


Current (A). F = Switching Frequency (Hz)
Load Capacitance (max.) 0.1 microF @ 150 VDC
0.6 microF @ 24 VDC

500 35010516 09/2020


140 DDM 690 00

Isolation
Isolation

Input Group to Output 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute


Output to Output 2500 VAC rms for 1 minute

Module Protection
Module Protection

Input Protection Resistor limited


Output Protection Transient Voltage Suppresion (internal)

Fuses
Fuses

Input Internal - None


External - User installed per local and national
electrical codes
Output Each output is protected by an electronic
shutdown:
For current output surges between 4 A and 30 A,
the input point will shutdown after 0.5 s.
For current surges greater than 30 A, the output
will shutdown immediately.

35010516 09/2020 501


140 DDM 690 00

140 DDM 690 00 Parameter Configuration

Parameter Configuration Window

Parameter and Default Values

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x%M-0x) WORD
(%IW-3x%MW-4X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 8 1
Address
Outputs Starting 1 1
Address
Outputs Ending 8 1
Address
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if module in other than local
(Grayed if AUX0
module in other AUX1
than local) AUX2
AUX3
Dual Mode DISABLE ENABLE
Filter Selection 0.5 ms 1.5 ms
Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE
Value 0 0-15 only enabled if Timeout State=USER DEFINED

502 35010516 09/2020


140 DDM 690 00

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 52).

35010516 09/2020 503


140 DDM 690 00

504 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DAM 590 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 50
140 DAM 590 00: 115 VAC 2x8 IN / 2x4 OUT Module

140 DAM 590 00: 115 VAC 2x8 IN / 2x4 OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DAM 590 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 506
Indicators 507
RIO Drop Location 508
Wiring Diagram 509
Specifications 511
Maintenance 514
140 DAM 590 00 Parameter Configuration 516

35010516 09/2020 505


140 DAM 590 00

Presentation

Function
The AC Input 115 VAC 2x8 / AC Output 115 VAC 2x4 module accepts 115 VAC inputs and
switches 115 VAC loads.

Illustration
This section contains a photograph of the front panel of the 140 DAM 590 00 module
The following figure shows the 140 DAM 590 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

NOTE: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered separately. (The
terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)

506 35010516 09/2020


140 DAM 590 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAM 590 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAM 590 module.

LEDs Color Indication when ON


Active Green Bus communication is present.
F Red A fault (external to the module) has been detected.
1 ... 8 (left columns) Green The indicated output point and channel is turned ON.
1 ... 16 (right two Green The indicated input point and channel is turned ON.
columns)

35010516 09/2020 507


140 DAM 590 00

RIO Drop Location

RIO Drop Location Figure


The following figure shows the RIO drop location.

NOTE: If the 140 DAM 590 00 module is used in a RIO drop, the 140 CRA 93X 00 RIO Drop must
be Version 1.04 at a minimum. Check the version label (see below) on the top front of the 140 CRA
93X 00 module and ensure that it is at the proper revision level

508 35010516 09/2020


140 DAM 590 00

Wiring Diagram

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DAM 590 00 wiring diagram.

35010516 09/2020 509


140 DAM 590 00

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before accessing the fuses,
 cut-off the power to the module (sensors and pre-actuators), and
 disconnect the terminal block.
 Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS
Protect the module output when an external switch is used to control an inductive load in parallel
with the module output. Use an external varistor (Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent) in parallel with
the switch.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

NOTE: When field wiring the I/O modules, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1-14 AWG
or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

NOTE:
The output protection is composed of an RC filter (snubber filter) and a varistor:
 The snubber filter is optional. The values of R and C are not provided as they depend on the
device used.
 Choose the varistor with appropriate electronic characteristics depending on the voltage
required by the device used.

510 35010516 09/2020


140 DAM 590 00

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 16 IN (2 groups x 8 points)


8 OUT (2 groups x 4 points)
External Power 85 ... 132 VAC required for output groups
Power Dissipation 5.5 W + 1.1 V x Total module load current
Bus Current required 250 mA
I/O map 1 input word
0.5 output word
Fault Detection Input: None
Output: Blown fuse detect, loss of field power.

Operating Voltage and Input Current*


Operating Voltage and Input Current*

50 Hz ON: 85 ... 132 VAC (11.1 mA max)


OFF: 0 ... 20 VAC
60 Hz ON: 79 ... 132 VAC (13.2 mA max)
OFF: 0 ... 20 VAC
* Do not use outside the 47 ... 63 Hz range
Maximum Allowable Leakage Current 2.1 mA
from an External Device to be
recognized as an OFF Condition.

Typical Input Impedance


Typical Input Impedance

50 Hz 14.4 kohms capacitive


60 Hz 12 kohms capacitive

Absolute Maximum Input


Absolute Maximum Input

Continuous 132 VAC


10 s 156 VAC
1 Cycle 200 VAC

35010516 09/2020 511


140 DAM 590 00

Response (Inputs)
Response (Inputs)

OFF - ON Min: 4.9 ms. Max: 0.75 line cycle.


ON - OFF Min: 7.3 ms. Max: 12.3 ms.

NOTE: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency.

Maximum Voltage (Output)


Maximum Voltage (Output)

Continuous 85 ... 132 VDC


10 sec 156 VDC
1 Cycle 200 VDC
ON State Drop / Point 1.5 VDC

Maximum Load Current / OFF State Leakage


Maximum Load Current / OFF State Leakage

Each Point 4 A continuous


Each Group 4 A continuous
Per Module 8 A continuous (see chart below for derating
above 50 degree)
OFF State Leakage / Point 2 mA @ 115 VDC

The following figure shows the 140 DAM 590 00 Operating Curve.

512 35010516 09/2020


140 DAM 590 00

Maximum Surge Current / Min. Load Current


Maximum Surge Current / Min. Load Current

One Cycle 30 A per point, 45 A per group


Two Cycle 20 A per point, 30 A per group
Three Cycle 10 A per point, 25 A per group
Min. Load Current 5 mA

Response
Response

OFF - ON / ON - OFF 0.5 of one line cycle max.


Applied DV / DT 400 V / micro sec

Isolation
Isolation

Group to Group 1000 VAC for 1 minute


Input or Output to Bus 1780 VAC for 1 minute

35010516 09/2020 513


140 DAM 590 00

Maintenance

Fuses
Fuses

Input Internal - None


External - User installed per local and national electrical codes
Output Internal - 5 A fuse for each group. For the location of the fuses, see figure
below.
External - User installed per local and national electrical codes

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before accessing the fuses,
 Remove the power to the module (sensors and pre-actuators), and
 disconnect the terminal block.
 always use a properly rated voltage sensing device at all line and load fuse clips to confirm
power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
DAMAGE TO MODULE OUTPUTS
Protect each group with a 5 A, 250 V fuse.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

514 35010516 09/2020


140 DAM 590 00

The following figure shows the fuse locations for the 140 DAM 590 00 module.

35010516 09/2020 515


140 DAM 590 00

140 DAM 590 00 Parameter Configuration

Parameter Configuration Window

Parameter and Default Values

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x%M-0x) WORD (%IW-
3x%MW-4X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 16 1
Address
Outputs Starting 1 1
Address
Outputs Ending 8 1
Address
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other than
in other than local) AUX1 local
AUX2
AUX3

516 35010516 09/2020


140 DAM 590 00

Name Default Value Options Description


Input Type BINARY –
Output Type BINARY –
Timeout State USER DEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE
Value 0 0-65535 only enabled if Timeout
State=USER
DEFINED

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 54).

35010516 09/2020 517


140 DAM 590 00

518 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Intrinsically Safe Modules
35010516 09/2020

Part VIII
Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog/Digital Modules

Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog/Digital Modules

Introduction
The following part provides information on the Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog/Digital Modules.

What Is in This Part?


This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
51 General Information 521
52 140 AII 330 00: Safe Analog IN Module 525
53 140 AII 330 10: Safe Analog IN Module 547
54 140 AIO 330 00: Safe Analog OUT Module 559
55 140 DII 330 00: Safe Discrete IN Module 571
56 140 DIO 330 00: Safe Discrete OUT Module 581

35010516 09/2020 519


Intrinsically Safe Modules

520 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
General Information
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 51
General Information

General Information

Purpose
This chapter provides general information on Intrinsically Safe Modules.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Purpose and Considerations 522
Wiring Practices 523

35010516 09/2020 521


General Information

Purpose and Considerations

Purpose
Intrinsic safety is a technique for ensuring that electrical energy supplied to circuits in a hazardous
area is too low to ignite volatile gases either by spark or thermal means. Intrinsically safe circuits
use energy limiting devices known as intrinsically safe barriers to prevent excess electrical energy
from being applied to electrical equipment located in the hazardous area.

Module Location
The Quantum Intrinsically Safe family of modules are entity certified to be installed in safe areas
to monitor/control intrinsically safe apparatus located In hazardous areas.

Intrinsically Safe Barriers


All Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules use galvanic isolation to provide the intrinsically safe barrier
between them and the field devices located in hazardous areas. Galvanic isolation in the form of
an opto-isolator and DC/DC converter is provided between the field side output circuitry and the
Quantum bus circuitry. The maximum agency specified intrinsically safe parameters are:

Intrinsically Safe Power Supply


DC/DC converters in Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules provide intrinsically safe power to field
devices located in hazardous areas. No external field power is required where these modules are
installed.

Installation of Quantum Intrinsically Safe Modules


Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules are designed to fit into a standard 140 XBP OXX 00 Quantum
rack. The modules can be installed in any slot position in the rack. (The first slot is normally
reserved for the power supply module.)

Hot Swapping

WARNING
LOSS OF ABILITY TO PERFORM SAFETY FUNCTIONS
Do not attempt to hot swap a Quantum Intrinsically Safe module.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

522 35010516 09/2020


General Information

Wiring Practices

Safe Area Wiring Practices


Intrinsically safe wiring between Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules and the field devices located
in the hazardous area must be separated from all other wiring. This can be accomplished by the
following methods:
 Separate blue wire ducts, raceways or conduits,
 Grounded metal or insulated partitions between the intrinsically safe and non- intrinsically safe
wiring,
 A separation of two inches (50 mm) of air space between the intrinsically safe and non-
intrinsically safe wiring. With this method, the intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe wires
must be tied down in separate bundles to maintain the required separation.

Identification and Labeling


Intrinsically safe wiring must be properly identified and labeled. Light blue color coding should be
used for all intrinsically safe wiring. The terminal strip wiring connector on all Quantum Intrinsically
Safe modules is colored blue to distinguish it from all non-intrinsically safe modules.
All wire ducts, raceways, cable trays, and open wiring must be labeled "Intrinsically Safe Wiring"
with a maximum spacing of 25 feet between labels.

Wiring Type and Grounding


Shielded twisted pair wires shall be used for each of the input or output pairs connected to the
Quantum Intrinsically Safe module blue terminal strip. The wire gauge size can be between
AWG 20 and AWG 12. Each twisted pair wire shield must be connected to the ground screws on
the rack, at the module end, and left open at the field device connection end in the hazardous area.
The instruction sheet packaged with each Quantum Intrinsically Safe module contains a wiring
diagram applicable to that type of module.

35010516 09/2020 523


General Information

Intrinsically Safe Wiring Diagram


The following diagram illustrates a Quantum Intrinsically Safe module using a separate raceway to
isolate its external wiring to the hazardous area. This is just one of the possible ways of field wiring
the module. Other methods would include bundling and laying the intrinsically safe wires in the
same wiring trough with the bundled non-intrinsically safe wires, with each bundle tied down and
separated by minimum of two inches of air space through out the wiring runs.

Questions Regarding Intrinsically Safe Wiring Practices


The information concerning intrinsic safety wiring practices is general and is not intended to cover
installation requirements for any specific site. Questions regarding intrinsic safety wiring
requirements for your site should be referred to the approval agencies listed

524 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 AII 330 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 52
140 AII 330 00: Safe Analog IN Module

140 AII 330 00: Safe Analog IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 AII 330 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 526
Indicators 527
Wiring Diagrams 528
Specifications 537
Addressing 540
Parameter Configuration 543

35010516 09/2020 525


140 AII 330 00

Presentation

Function
The Quantum 140 AII 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input module will interface with eight
intrinsically safe analog inputs, which are software-configurable on a module basis with either
RTD/Resistance or thermocouple/millivolt inputs.
When it is configured as an RTD/Resistance Input module, it supports 100W, 200W, 500W, and
1000W platinum (American or European) and nickel sensors. The module also allows any mix and
match of sensor type or resistance inputs that can be configured by the software.
When it is configured as a Thermocouple/Millivolt Input module, it accepts B, J, K, E, R, S and T
type thermocouples. The module also allows any mix and match of thermocouple or millivolt inputs
that can be configured by the software.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 AII 330 00 Intrinsically Safe module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

526 35010516 09/2020


140 AII 330 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 AII 330 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 AII 330 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication When On


Active Green Communicating with the PLC
F Red A broken wire (4 ... 20 mA, only), out-of-range condition or
short circuit on any channel
1 .. 8 Red A broken wire, out-of-range condition or short circuit on the
indicated channel

35010516 09/2020 527


140 AII 330 00

Wiring Diagrams

Cenelec Approved Wiring Diagrams


The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module configured with an
RTD/Resistance connection.

528 35010516 09/2020


140 AII 330 00

The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a
Thermocouple connection.

35010516 09/2020 529


140 AII 330 00

CSA Approved Wiring Diagrams


The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with an
RTD/resistor connection.

530 35010516 09/2020


140 AII 330 00

The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a
thermocouple connection.

35010516 09/2020 531


140 AII 330 00

FM Approved Wiring Diagrams


The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module when configured as a RTD/resistor
connection.

532 35010516 09/2020


140 AII 330 00

The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a thermocouple
connection.

35010516 09/2020 533


140 AII 330 00

UL Approved Wiring Diagrams


The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with an RTD/resistor
connection.

534 35010516 09/2020


140 AII 330 00

The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a thermocouple
connection.

35010516 09/2020 535


140 AII 330 00

Field Wiring
Field wiring to the module shall consist of separate shielded twisted pair wires. The acceptable field
wire gauge shall be AWG 20 to AWG 12. In a 2-wire field configuration, the maximum field wire
length is a function of the required accuracy. Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe
field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of
energy to the hazardous area.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

RTD/Resistance Input Wiring


When the Universal Input module is configured as a RTD/Resistance Input module, the maximum
wire length (distance to a sensor) for a 3 or 4-wire configuration is 200 meters.

Thermocouple/Millivolt Input Wiring


When the module is configured as a Thermocouple/Millivolt Input module, the sum of thermocouple
source or voltage source impedance and wire resistance should not exceed 200 ohms for rated
accuracy.

Fixed Wiring System


The Quantum140 AII 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input module is designed with a fixed wiring
system where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed position, blue terminal strip which
is plugged into the module.

Terminal Strip Color and Keying Assignment


The module’s 140 XTS 332 00 field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to identify it as an
intrinsically safe connector.
The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the insertion of an inappropriate connector in the module.
The following table provides the keying assignment.

Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding
Intrinsically Safe 140 AII 330 00 CDF ABE

536 35010516 09/2020


140 AII 330 00

Specifications

RTD/Resistance Module Specifications


Specifications for the Quantum140 AII 330 00 module configured as an Intrinsically Safe
RTD/Resistance input module are as follows.

Number of Channels 8 IN
RTD Types (Configurable)
Platinum (American and -200 °C to +850 °C
European) – PT100, PT200,
PT500, PT1000
Nickel – N100, N200, N500, -60 °C to +180 °C
N1000
Measurement Current
PT100, PT200, N100, N200 2.5 mA 0.5 mA
PT500, PT1000, N500,
N1000
Input Impedance >10M ohms
Linearity +/- 0.003% of full scale (0 ... 60°C)
Resolution 12 bits plus sign (0.1°C)
Absolute Accuracy +/- 0.5 °C (25 °C) +/- 0.9 °C (0 .. 60 °C)
Accuracy Error @ 25°C Typical: +/- 0.05% of full scale Maximum:
+/- 0.1% of full scale
Isolation
Channel to Channel None
Channel to Bus > 100 dB @ 50/60 Hz
Input Filter 1780 VAC @ 47-63 Hz or 2500 VDC for 1 min.
Update Time (All Channels)
3-wire 2 or 4-wire 1.35 sec.
750 m sec.
Bus Current Required 400 mA
Power Dissipation 2W
External Power Not required for this module
Fault Detection Out of range or broken wire conditions
Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards
Fusing Internal-not user accessible

35010516 09/2020 537


140 AII 330 00

Thermocouple/Millivolt Module Specifications


The following table shows the specifications for the Thermocouple/Millivolt module.

Number of Channels 8 IN
TC Types and Ranges
Types J K E T S R B Ranges (°C) -210 ... +760
-270 ... +1370
-270 ... +1000
-270 ... +400
-50 ... +1665
-50 ... +1665
+130 ... +1820
Millivolt Ranges -100 mV ... +100 mV*
-25 mV ... +25 mV*
*Open circuit detect can be disabled on these
ranges
TC Circuit Resistance/Max 200 ohms max for rated accuracy
Source Resistance
Input Impedance >1M ohms
Input Filter Single low pass @ nominal 20 Hz. Plus notch
filter at 50/60 Hz
Normal Noise Rejection 120 dB min @ 50 or 60 Hz
Cold Junction Compensation Internal CJC operates 0 ... 60°C (errors are
(CJC) included in the accuracy specification). The
connector door must be closed. Remote CJC can
be implemented by connecting the TC (which
monitors the external junction block temperature)
to channel 1. Types J, K, and T are
recommended for best accuracy.
Resolution
TC Ranges Choice of: 1 degree C (Default) 0.1 degree C
1 degree F 0.1 degree F
Millivolt Ranges +/- 100 mV range, 3.05 microvolts (16 bits)
+/- 25 mV range, 0.76 microvolts (16 bits)
TC Absolute Accuracy (see Note 1)
Types J, K, E, T (see Note 2) +/- 2°C +/- 0.1% of reading
Types S, R, B (see Note 3) +/- 4°C +/- 0.1% of reading
Millivolt Absolute Accuracy
@ 25°C +/- 20 microvolts +/- 0.1% of reading
Accuracy Drift w/ Temperature 0.15 microvolts/°C + 0.0015% of reading/°C max.

538 35010516 09/2020


140 AII 330 00

Isolation
Channel to Channel None
Channel to Bus 1780 VAC @ 47-63 Hz or 2500 VDC for
1 min.
Update Time 1 sec. (all channels)
Fault Detection Out of range or broken wire conditions
Bus Current Required 400 mA
Power Dissipation 2W
External Power Not required for this module
Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards
Fusing Internal - not user accessible

NOTE: 1. Absolute accuracy includes all errors from the internal CJC, TC curvature, offset plus
gain, for module temperature of 0 ... 60 degrees C. User supplied TC errors not included.
2. For type J and K, add 1.5 degrees C inaccuracy for temperatures below -100 degrees C.
Type B cannot be used below 130 degrees C.
4. All TC ranges have an open TC detect and upscale output. This results in a reading 7FFFh or
32767 decimal when an open TC is detected.

35010516 09/2020 539


140 AII 330 00

Addressing

Flat Addressing
This module requires ten contiguous, 16-bit input words (%IW)—eight for input data, one for
channel status, and one for the remote cold junction temperature. The data words formats are as
follows.

The following shows the word 9 register.

The following figure shows the word 10 register.

540 35010516 09/2020


140 AII 330 00

Topological Addressing
Topological addresses for the 140 AII 330 00 Input Module:

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
%I[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Out of range
%I[[\b.e\]r.m.1.2 Range warning
•••
Input 8 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.8 Value
%I[\b.e\]r.m.8.1 Out of range
%I[\b.e\]r.m.8.2 Range warning
Status Word %IW[\b.e\]r.m..9 Status of input channels
Cold Junction Temperature %IW[\b.e\]r.m.10 Remote Cold Junction
Temperature

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

IODDT
The 140 AII 330 00 Input Module uses the T_ANA_IN_VWE IODDT:

IODDT Name Object Data Type Name


T_ANA_IN_VWE %CH[\b.e\]r.m.c ANA_IN_VWE userdefined
%IWr.m.c.0 Int .VALUE
%Ir.m.c.1 Bool .ERROR
%Ir.m.c.2 Bool .WARNING

Used abbreviations: r = rack, m = module slot, c = channel, b = bus, e = equipment (drop).


Bus and Drop default to 1 if not specified and can be left off.
NOTE: In Quantum IODDTs for analog modules and expert modules the data type Bool is used for
%I and %Q.

35010516 09/2020 541


140 AII 330 00

I/O Map Status Byte


The I/O map status byte is used by the 140 AII 330 00 Input Module as follows.

542 35010516 09/2020


140 AII 330 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values (RTD)


Parameter Configuration Window (RTD)

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping WORD (%IW-3X) -
Inputs Starting 1 -
Address
Inputs Ending 10 -
Address
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if module in other
(Grayed if module in AUX0 than local
other than local) AUX1
AUX2
AUX3

35010516 09/2020 543


140 AII 330 00

Name Default Value Options Description


Module Input RTD/Resistance TC/mV for Module Input=TC/mV see
Parameter and Default values
(TC), page 545
Module
Resolution 1.0 Deg 0.1 Deg
Output Unit Centigrade Fahrenheit
Value Type Temp Raw Value
Channel1
Disable No Yes
Wire 4 wire 2 wire
3 wire
Type "Pt 100, -200 to 850" "Pt 200, -200 to 850"
"Pt 500, -200 to 850"
"Pt 1000, -200 to 850"
"Ni 100, -60 to 180"
"Ni 200, -60 to 180"
"Ni 500, -60 to 180"
"Ni 1000, -60 to 180"
"R, 0 to 766,66 ohms"
"R, 0 to 4000 ohms"
"Apt 100, -100 to 450"
"Apt 200, -100 to 450"
"Apt 500, -100 to 450"
"Apt 1000, -100 to 450"
Channel2-Channel8 see Channel1

544 35010516 09/2020


140 AII 330 00

Parameter and Default values (TC)


Parameter Configuration Window (TC)

Name Default Value Options Description


Module Input RTD/Resistance TC/mV for Module Input=RTD/Resistance see Parameter
and Default values (RTD), page 543
Module
Resolution 1.0 Deg 0.1 Deg
Output Unit Centigrade Fahrenheit
Cold Junction Compensator On board Channel 1
Channel1
Not installed No Yes
Raw Output Amplifier 25 100
Open Circuit Test No Yes
Type Undefined J, Gain=25
K, Gain=25
E, Gain=25
T, Gain=100
S, Gain=100
R, Gain=100
B, Gain=100
Channel2-Channel8 see Channel1

35010516 09/2020 545


140 AII 330 00

546 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 AII 330 10
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 53
140 AII 330 10: Safe Analog IN Module

140 AII 330 10: Safe Analog IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 AII 330 10 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 548
Indicators 549
Wiring Diagrams 550
Specifications 555
Addressing 556
Parameter Configuration 558

35010516 09/2020 547


140 AII 330 10

Presentation

Function
The Quantum 140 AII 330 10 Intrinsically Safe Current Input module interfaces with eight
intrinsically safe analog inputs which are software-configurable. The module accepts 0 ... 20 mA,
0 ... 25 mA, and 4 ... 20 mA inputs. The module allows any mix and match of current input ranges
that can be configured by the software. The module provides power to intrinsically safe transmitters
located in hazardous areas.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 AII 330 10 Intrinsically Safe module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

548 35010516 09/2020


140 AII 330 10

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 AII 330 10 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 AII 330 10 module.

LEDs Color Indication When On


Active Green Communicating with the PLC
F Red A broken wire (4 ... 20 mA, only) or out-of-range condition on
any channel
1 .. 8 Red A broken wire or out-of-range condition on the indicated
channel

35010516 09/2020 549


140 AII 330 10

Wiring Diagrams

Cenelec Approved Wiring Diagrams


The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for the 140 AII 330 10 instrinsically safe current
input module.

550 35010516 09/2020


140 AII 330 10

CSA Approved Wiring Diagram


The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module.

35010516 09/2020 551


140 AII 330 10

FM Approved Wiring Diagrams


The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module.

552 35010516 09/2020


140 AII 330 10

UL Approved Wiring Diagram


The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module.

35010516 09/2020 553


140 AII 330 10

Field Wiring
Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded, twisted pair wires. The acceptable field
wire gauge is AWG 20 to AWG 12. Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device
should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to
the hazardous area.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Fixed Wiring System


The Quantum 140 AII 330 10 Intrinsically Safe Current Input module is designed with a fixed wiring
system, where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed position, blue terminal strip which
is plugged into the module.

Terminal Strip Color and Keying Assignment


The module’s 140 XTS 332 00 field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to identify it as an
intrinsically safe connector.
The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module. The
keying assignment is given below.

Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding
Intrinsically Safe 140 AII 330 10 CEF ABD

554 35010516 09/2020


140 AII 330 10

Specifications

General Specifications
Specifications for the Quantum 140 AII 330 10 Intrinsically Safe Current Input module are as
follows.

Number of Channels 8 IN
Current Input
Linear Measuring Range 4 ... 20 mA
0 ... 20 mA
0 ... 25 mA
Absolute Maximum Input 25 mA internally limited
Input Impedance 100 ohms +/- 0.1% between V- and signal terminals
Resolution 4 ... 20 mA, 0 to 4,095 counts
4 ... 20 mA0 to 16,000 counts
0 ... 20 mA, 0 to 20,000 counts
0 ... 25 mA, 0 to 25,000 counts
Available Voltage Terminals V+, V- :~ 14.5 Vdc at 25 mA
Terminals V+, Signal : ~ 13.6 Vdc at 20 mA
Accuracy Error @ 25°C Typical: +/- 0.05% of full scale
Maximum: +/- 0.1% of full scale
Linearity + 0.003% of full scale
Accuracy Drift w/ Temperature Typical: +/- 0.0025% of full scale /°C
Maximum: +/- 0.005% of full scale /°C
Common Mode Rejection > 100 dB @ 50/60 Hz
Input Filter Single pole low pass, -3 dB cutoff @ 15 Hz, +/- 20%
Isolation
Channel to Channel None
Channel to Bus 1780 Vac @ 47-63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min.
Update Time 750 ms for all channels
Fault Detection Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA mode)
Bus Current Required 1.5 A
Power Dissipation 7.5 W
External Power Not required
Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards
Fusing Internal, not accessible

35010516 09/2020 555


140 AII 330 10

Addressing

Flat Addressing
This module requires nine contiguous, 16-bit input words (%IW)—eight for input data and one for
channel status. The data words formats are as follows.

The following shows the word 9 register.

NOTE: The word 9 register is the status of input channels. This status works for all configurations
beginning PV04 and for any version (PV) with configuration 4... 20 mA. But the status doesn’t work
for PV<04 with configurations 0...20 mA or 0...25 mA.

Topological Addressing
Topological addresses for the 140 AII 030 10 Input Module:

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
%I[\b.e\]r.m.1.1 Broken wire or Out of range
•••
Input 8 %IW[\b.e\]r.m.8 Value
%I[\b.e\]r.m.8.1 Broken wire or Out of range
Status Word %IW[\b.e\]r.m.9 Status of input channels

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

556 35010516 09/2020


140 AII 330 10

IODDT
The 140 AII 030 10 Input Module uses the T_ANA_IN_VE IODDT:

IODDT Name Object Data Type Name


T_ANA_IN_VE %CH[\b.e\]r.m.c ANA_IN_VWE userdefined
%IWr.m.c.0 Int .VALUE
%Ir.m.c.1 Bool .ERROR

Used abbreviations: r = rack, m = module slot, c = channel, b = bus, e = equipment (drop).


Bus and Drop default to 1 if not specified and can be left off.
NOTE: In Quantum IODDTs for analog modules and expert modules the data type Bool is used for
%I and %Q.

I/O Map Status Byte


The I/O map status byte is used by the 140 AII 030 10 Input Module as follows.

35010516 09/2020 557


140 AII 330 10

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping WORD (%IW-3X) -
Inputs Starting Address 1 -
Inputs Ending Address 9 -
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module in AUX0 module in other
other than local) AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3
Channels
CH1 Range "4 ... 20 mA, 0-16000" "0... 25 mA, 0-25000"
"0 ... 20 mA, 0-20000"
"4 ... 20 mA, 0-4095"
CH2 Range-CH8 Range see CH1 Range

558 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 AIO 330 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 54
140 AIO 330 00: Safe Analog OUT Module

140 AIO 330 00: Safe Analog OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 AIO 330 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 560
Indicators 561
Wiring Diagrams 562
Specifications 567
Addressing 568
Parameter Configuration 569

35010516 09/2020 559


140 AIO 330 00

Presentation

Function
The Quantum 140 AIO 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output module controls and monitors
current loops in intrinsically safe applications. The module provides 8 dual-ended output channels
that are referenced over sense resistors to a single Common. The output ranges are 4 ... 20 mA,
0 ... 20 mA, and 0 ... 25 mA. This module detects broken wires on a per-channel basis indicates
their location on the front panel LEDs, and transmits the status to the PLC.

Illustration
The following figure shows the140 AIO 330 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

560 35010516 09/2020


140 AIO 330 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 AIO 330 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 AIO 330 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication When On


Active Green Communicating with the PLC
F Red A broken wire (4 ... 20 mA, only) or out-of-range condition on
any channel
1 .. 8 Red A broken wire or out-of-range condition on the indicated
channel

35010516 09/2020 561


140 AIO 330 00

Wiring Diagrams

CSA Approved Wiring Diagram


The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module.

562 35010516 09/2020


140 AIO 330 00

FM Approved Wiring Diagram


The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module.

35010516 09/2020 563


140 AIO 330 00

UL Approved Wiring Diagrams


The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module.

564 35010516 09/2020


140 AIO 330 00

Cenelec Approved Wiring Diagram


The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module.

35010516 09/2020 565


140 AIO 330 00

Field Wiring
Field wiring to the module should consist of separate shielded, twisted pair wires. The acceptable
field wire gauge should be AWG 30 to AWG 18. Wiring between the module and the intrinsically
safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe
levels of energy to the hazardous area.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Fixed Wiring System


The Quantum140 AIO 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output module is designed with a fixed
wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed position, blue terminal strip
which is plugged into the module.

Terminal Strip Color and Keying Assignment


The module’s 140 XTS 332 00 field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to identify it as an
intrinsically safe connector.
The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module. The
keying assignment is given below.

Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding
Intrinsically Safe 140 AIO 330 00 CEF ABD

566 35010516 09/2020


140 AIO 330 00

Specifications

General Specifications
Specifications for the Quantum 140 AIO 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output module are as
follows.

Number of Channels 8 OUT


Loop Resistance 500 ohms maximum
Ranges 4 ... 20 mA (0 to 4095) 4 ... 20 mA (0 to 16000)
0 ... 20 mA (0 to 20000) 0 ... 25 mA (0 to 25000)
Resolution 15 bits within 4 ... 20 mA
Accuracy Drift Typical: 40 PPM/°C.
w/Temperature Maximum: 70 PPM/°C
Accuracy Error @ 25°C +/- 0.2% of full scale
Linearity +/- 1 LSB
Isolation
Channel to Channel None
Channel to Bus 1780 VAC RMS for 1 minute
Update Time 4 ms - for all channels
Settling Time 1 ms to +/- 0.1% of the final value
Bus Current Required 2.5 Amps
Power Dissipation 12.5 W
External Power Not required for this module
Fault Detection Open circuit in 4 ... 20 mA range
Voltmeter Monitor Specifications
Range 0.250 ... 1.250 V
Scaling (Volts) = (mA) x 0.0625

Output Impedance 62.5 W Typical


Wire Length 1 m maximum
Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards
Fusing Internal - not user accessible

35010516 09/2020 567


140 AIO 330 00

Addressing

Flat Addressing
This module requires eight contiguous, 16-bit words (%MW) for output data. The data words formats
are as follows.

Topological Addressing
Topological addresses for the 140AIO33000 Output Module:

Point I/O Object Comment


Output 1 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.1 Value
Output 2 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.2 Value
•••
Output 7 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.7 Value
Output 8 %QW[\b.e\]r.m.8 Value

Used abbreviations: b = bus, e = equipment (drop), r = rack, m = module slot.

I/O Map Status Byte


The I/O map status byte is used by the 140AIO33000 Output Module as follows.

568 35010516 09/2020


140 AIO 330 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping WORD (%MW-4X) -
Outputs Starting 1 -
Address
Outputs Ending 8 -
Address
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if module in
(Grayed if module in AUX0 other than local
other than local) AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
Channels
Channel1

35010516 09/2020 569


140 AIO 330 00

Name Default Value Options Description


Range Selection "4-20 mA, 0-16000" "4-20 mA, 0-4095"
"0-20 mA, 0-20000"
"0-25 mA, 0-25000"
Timeout State DISABLE HOLD LAST VALUE
USER DEFINED
Timeout Value 0 0-32767 only enabled if Timeout State
= USER DEFINED
Channel2-Channel8 see Channel1

570 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DII 330 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 55
140 DII 330 00: Safe Discrete IN Module

140 DII 330 00: Safe Discrete IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DII 330 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 572
Indicators 573
Wiring Diagrams 574
Specifications 579
Parameter Configuration 580

35010516 09/2020 571


140 DII 330 00

Presentation

Function
The Quantum 140 DII 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Digital Input module provides safe power to dry
contact closures e.g., push buttons, selector switches, float switches, flow switches, limit switches,
etc., in a hazardous area, and receives the proportional current to indicate an on/off state. The
received current is converted into digital signals that is transferred to the PLC.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DII 330 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

572 35010516 09/2020


140 DII 330 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DII 330 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DII 330 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication When On


Active Green Bus communication is present
1 .. 8 Green The indicated point or channel is on

35010516 09/2020 573


140 DII 330 00

Wiring Diagrams

Celenec Approved Wiring Diagram


The following is a Celenec certified wiring diagram for this module.

574 35010516 09/2020


140 DII 330 00

CSA Approved Wiring Diagram


The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module.

35010516 09/2020 575


140 DII 330 00

FM Approved Wiring Diagram


The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module.

576 35010516 09/2020


140 DII 330 00

UL Approved Wiring Diagram


The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module.

Fixed Wiring System


The Quantum 140 DII 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Digital Input module is designed with a fixed wiring
system where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed position, blue terminal strip which
is plugged into the module.

35010516 09/2020 577


140 DII 330 00

Field Wiring
Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded twisted pair wires. The acceptable field
wire gauge is AWG 20 to AWG 12. Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device
should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices, to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to
the hazardous area.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Terminal Strip Color and Keying Assignment


The module’s 140 XTS 332 00 field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to identify it as an
intrinsically safe connector.
The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module. The
keying assignment is given below.

Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding
Intrinsically Safe 140 DII 330 00 CDE ABF

578 35010516 09/2020


140 DII 330 00

Specifications

General Specifications
Specifications for the Quantum140 DII 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Digital Input module are as follows.

Number of Input Points 8 IN


Operating Voltages and Currents
No load voltage (between 8 VDC
input + and input -)
Short circuit current 8 mA
Switching point 1.2 mA ... 2.1 mA
Switching hysteresis 0.2 mA
Switching Frequency 100 Hz maximum
Response
OFF-ON 1 ms
ON-OFF 1 ms
Isolation
Channel to Channel None
Channel to Bus 1780 VAC, 47-63 Hz or 2500 VDC for 1 min.
Internal Resistance 2.5 K ohms
Input Protection Resistor limited
Fault Detection None
Bus Current Required 400 mA
Power Dissipation 2W
External Power Not required
Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards
Fusing Internal - not user accessible

35010516 09/2020 579


140 DII 330 00

Parameter Configuration

Parameter and Default values


Parameter Configuration Window

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%I-1x) WORD (%IW-3X)
Inputs Starting 1 1
Address
Inputs Ending 8 1
Address
Input Type BINARY BCD
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other
in other than local) AUX1 than local
AUX2
AUX3

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 39).

580 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 DIO 330 00
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 56
140 DIO 330 00: Safe Discrete OUT Module

140 DIO 330 00: Safe Discrete OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 DIO 330 00 module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 582
Indicators 583
Wiring Diagrams 584
Specification 589
140 DIO 330 00 Parameter Configuration 590

35010516 09/2020 581


140 DIO 330 00

Presentation

Function
The Quantum 140 DIO 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Digital Output module provides intrinsically safe
power to a variety of components such as solenoid valves, LEDs, etc., located in a hazardous area.
This module is for use with sink devices only.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 DIO 330 00 module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Fuse Cutouts
4 Field Wiring Terminal Strip
5 Removable Door
6 Customer Identification Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

582 35010516 09/2020


140 DIO 330 00

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DIO 330 00 module.

Descriptions
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DIO 330 00 module.

LEDs Color Indication When On


Active Green Bus communication is present
1 .. 8 Green The indicated point or channel is on

35010516 09/2020 583


140 DIO 330 00

Wiring Diagrams

Celenec Approved Wiring Diagram


The following is a Celenec certified wiring diagram for this module.

584 35010516 09/2020


140 DIO 330 00

CSA Approved Wiring Diagram


The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module.

35010516 09/2020 585


140 DIO 330 00

FM Approved Wiring Diagram


The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module.

586 35010516 09/2020


140 DIO 330 00

UL Approved Wiring Diagram


The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module.

35010516 09/2020 587


140 DIO 330 00

Fixed Wiring System


The Quantum 140 DIO 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Digital Output module is designed with a fixed
wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed position, blue terminal strip,
which is plugged into the module.

Field Wiring
Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded, twisted pair wires. Acceptable field wire
gauges go from AWG 20 to AWG 12. Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field
device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices, to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of
energy to the hazardous area.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Terminal Strip Color and Keying Assignment


The module’s 140 XTS 332 00 field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to identify it as an
intrinsically safe connector.
The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module. The
keying assignment is given below.

Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding
Intrinsically Safe 140 DIO 330 00 CDE ABF

588 35010516 09/2020


140 DIO 330 00

Specification

Specifications Table
Specifications for the Quantum 140 DIO 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Digital Output module are as
follows.

Number of Output Points 8 OUT


Output Voltage 24 V (open)
Maximum Load Current
Each Point 45 mA
Per Module 360 mA
Off State Leakage/Point 0.4 mA
Response (Resistive Loads)
OFF-ON 1 ms
ON-OFF 1 ms
Output Protection (Internal) Transient voltage suppression
Isolation
Channel to Channel None
Channel to Bus 1780 VAC, 47-63 Hz or 2500 VDC for 1 min.
Fault Detection None
Bus Current Required 2.2 Amp (full load)
Power Dissipation 5 W (full load)
External Power Not required
Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety requirements
Fusing Internal - not user accessible

35010516 09/2020 589


140 DIO 330 00

140 DIO 330 00 Parameter Configuration

Parameter Configuration Window

Parameter and Default Values

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping BIT (%M-0x) WORD (%MW-4X)
Output Starting 1 1
Address
Output Ending 8 1
Address
Output Type BINARY –
Task MAST FAST fixed to MAST if
(Grayed if module AUX0 module in other than
in other than local) AUX1 local
AUX2
AUX3
Timeout State USERDEFINED HOLD LAST VALUE
Value 0 0-255 only enabled if Timeout
State=USERDEFINED

I/O Mapping
More information on the I/O mapping is provided in the general information on Quantum
addressing modes (see page 45).

590 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Safety I/O Modules
35010516 09/2020

Part IX
Quantum Safety I/O Modules

Quantum Safety I/O Modules

Introduction
The following part provides information on Quantum Safety Analog/Digital I/O Modules.

What Is in This Part?


This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
57 General Information 593
58 140 SAI 940 00S: Analog IN Module 597
59 140 SDI 953 00S: Digital IN Module 611
60 140 SDO 953 00S: Digital OUT Module 623

35010516 09/2020 591


Safety I/O Modules

592 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
General Information
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 57
General Information

General Information

Purpose
This chapter provides general information on Safety Modules. Read thoroughly the Quantum
Safety PLC - Safety Manual (part number 33003879) to build a safety PLC according to the safety
certifications.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
General Information on the Safety I/O Modules 594
Safety I/O Modules Diagnostics 595

35010516 09/2020 593


General Information

General Information on the Safety I/O Modules

Introduction
The following 3 Quantum Safety I/O modules are certified for use in safety applications:
 140 SAI 940 00S (Analog Input)
 140 SDI 953 00S (Digital Input)
 140 SDO 953 00S (Digital Output)

The 3 Safety I/O modules allow you to connect the Safety PLC to the sensors and actuators, which
are part of the Safety loop. All of them are composed of 2 micro controller systems running the
same program, sharing the same information and checking each other periodically. You can install
these I/O modules in the local backplane or in remote I/O drops.

Description of the CPU-I/O Communication


In general, the Quantum Safety CPU masters all backplane exchanges whereas the other modules
are slaves. Between Safety CPU and Safety I/Os, data are exchanged through a dual port RAM,
located in the I/O module.
For the communication between CPU and remote I/Os (RIOs), you must use the following 2 non-
interfering modules:
 140 CRP 932 00 (RIO head adapter), located in the local rack
 140 CRA 932 00 (RIO drop adapter), located in the RIO drop

Optionally, you can use Fiber Optic repeater modules (140 NRP 954 00, 140 NRP 954 01C).
Those modules enhance remote I/O network noise immunity and increase cable distance while
maintaining the full dynamic range of the network and the safety integrity level.
The communication protocol between the Safety I/O and CPU secures their exchanges. It allows
both to check the correctness of received data, and detect any failure of the transmitter or during
the transmission. Thus, a safety loop may include any non-interfering RIO adapters and backplane.
For details on this topic, see Safety I/O Modules Diagnostics (see page 595).
The Safety I/O modules provide features for line monitoring, see Safety I/O Modules Diagnostics
(see page 595).
NOTE: Use the red labels provided with the Quantum Safety /IO modules to clearly indicate the
Safety modules.

594 35010516 09/2020


General Information

Safety I/O Modules Diagnostics

Description of the I/O Diagnostics


The following table lists the field diagnostics of the Safety I/O modules:

Diagnostics Analog Input Digital Input Digital Output


Out of Range yes – –
Broken Wire yes yes –
Field Power – yes yes
Overload – – yes

NOTE: Short circuit of the wiring is not detected for the input modules. It is your responsibility to
make sure that the modules are wired correctly.
In addition, the Quantum Safety PLC provides diagnostics of the communication between Safety
CPU and Safety I/O modules, for instance a CRC. Thus, it is not only checked that the data
received are the data sent but also that the data are updated. To handle disturbances, for example
by EMC effects, which may temporarily corrupt your data, you can configure a maximum accepted
consecutive CRC error for each module (ranging from 1 to 3). For a detailed procedure, see the
chapter “Configuring I/O Modules for Safety Projects” in the Unity Pro XLS Operating Mode Manual
Safety PLC Specifics .
NOTE: Unity Pro is the old name of Control Expert for versions ≤ V13.1.

Diagnostics at Power Up
At power up, the I/O modules perform an extended self-test during about 30 seconds. If these tests
are unsuccessful, the modules are not considered to be healthy and do not start. The inputs and
outputs are then set to 0.
If the 24 VDC external power supply is not connected to the digital input or digital output modules,
the power up self-tests do not take place and the modules does not start.

Runtime Diagnostics
During runtime, the I/O modules perform self-tests. The input modules verify that they are able to
read data from the sensors over the complete range. The output modules perform pulse tests on
their switches with a duration lower than 1 ms.

35010516 09/2020 595


General Information

Description of the General Over Voltage Diagnostics


Because the electronics may not work up to the theoretical maximum output voltage of the power
supplies, the I/O modules must supervise the backplane power supply voltage.
The following table describes the supervision of the power supply:

The power supply of ... Is monitored by ...


the backplane, which has 2 over voltage supervisors, that is 1 for each micro processor
a theoretical maximum system. Each supervisor is able to handle a possible over voltage
output voltage of 18.5 V, by opening its power switch and triggering its reset block, which
manages transitions between the states of power on and power
off and resets both processors when active.
the field side, which is 2 over and under voltage supervisors, that is 1 for each micro
generated by DC-to-DC processor system. If the 2 isolated DC-to-DC converters
converters, generating the power supply to the field side electronics
experience a fault, the supervisors signal this condition to its
particular processor through an isolator.
the process, which is one 2 over and under voltage supervisors, that is 1 for each micro
of the PELV type with a processor system, in the same way as they monitor the DC-to-DC
maximum output voltage converters. In case of a fault, the supervisors signal this condition
of 60 V, to the user logic by setting a status bit in order to warn the system
of possible inconsistent inputs.

DANGER
LOSS OF THE ABILITY TO PERFORM SAFETY FUNCTIONS
Use the correct process power supply, which is a PELV type with a maximum output of 60 V.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

596 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 SAI 940 00S
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 58
140 SAI 940 00S: Analog IN Module

140 SAI 940 00S: Analog IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 SAI 940 00S module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 598
Indicators 600
Wiring Diagram 601
Specifications 604
Addressing 606
Parameter Configuration 610

35010516 09/2020 597


140 SAI 940 00S

Presentation

Function
140 SAI 940 00S is a 16 bits 4-20 mA, 8-channel current analog input module.
NOTE: If an error is detected during power-up self tests, the module is unable to start any
communication with the host until the error disappears.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 SAI 940 00S module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Field Wiring Terminal Block (not provided with the module)
4 Removable Door (not provided with the module)
5 Red Customer Identification Label (Fold label provided with the module and place it inside the door)

NOTE: The housing of safety modules is red and a red customer identification label is provided
with Quantum Safety I/O modules. It shall be placed on the terminal block.

598 35010516 09/2020


140 SAI 940 00S

Grounding Kit
It is recommanded to use the STB XSP 3000 earthing kit and the (STB XSP 3010 or
STB XSP 3020) grounding clips. The following figure shows those elements.

Kit Comes with...


STB XSP 3000 two side brackets, one 1 m grounding bar and one FE grounding clamp

STB XSP 3010 10 small cable clamps for 1.5mm to 6.5mm cable

STB XSP 3020 10 medium cable clamps for 5mm to 11mm cable

35010516 09/2020 599


140 SAI 940 00S

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 SAI 940 00S module.

NOTE: The 140 SAI 940 00S module does not use the 9 to 16 red and green channel LEDs.

Description
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 SAI 940 00S module.

Type of LED Id Color State Meaning


LED
System R Green ON Power ON
State LED
OFF Power OFF
Active Green ON The module is communicating with the host.
OFF The module is not communicating with the host.
F Red ON An internal diagnostic error is detected.
OFF No internal diagnostic error is detected.
Channel 1 .. 8 Green ON The input current on the channel is in the 3.75 ... 20.25 mA range.
LED
OFF The input current on the channel is out of the 3.75 ... 20.25 mA range.
Red ON The channel is not operational.
OFF The channel is operational.

NOTE: The 140 SAI 940 00S module has only 8 channels. LEDs 9 to 16 are never lit.

600 35010516 09/2020


140 SAI 940 00S

Wiring Diagram

Precautions
Grounding:
Connect each end of the cable shields, as follows:
 on the sensors side: connect to the shield continuation terminals (ground terminals),
 on the module side: clamp the shielding to the ground using grounding equipment STB XSP
3000 grounding kit (see page 599) and grounding clips (STB XSP 3010 or STB XSP 3020).
Field wiring:
Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded twisted pair wires.

35010516 09/2020 601


140 SAI 940 00S

Illustration
The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 SAI 940 00S module.

N/C: No Connection
internal input impedance: 287 ohms
Rmin (of the passive device): 913 ohms
Rmax (of the passive device): 7713 ohms

602 35010516 09/2020


140 SAI 940 00S

NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 603


140 SAI 940 00S

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 8 Channel IN


External Power Not required
Bus Current required (Module) 400 mA
Power Dissipation 3,5 W max
I/O map 13 input words
Fault Detection  out of 4 .. 20 mA range
 internal invalid channel
 system inoperative

Isolation (channel to Bus) 1500 VAC eff for 1 minute


Isolation (channel to channel) 500 VAC eff for 1 minute

Current / Input
Current / Input

Absolute Current (max.) 35 mA


Linear Measuring Range 0 .. 25 mA, 0 .. 64 800 counts
Internal input impedance 287 ohms nominal

Linear Measuring Ranges Table


Linear measuring range

Data Format Input Normal Warning


16-bit Format 0 .. 25 mA 0 .. 64 800 counts < 9 720 (3.75 mA)
(2 592 pt/mA) > 52 488 (20.25 mA)

604 35010516 09/2020


140 SAI 940 00S

Resolution / Conversion
Resolution / Conversion

Resolution 16 bits (0 ... 65 536 counts)


Absolute Accuracy Error +/- 0,3% @ 25 degrees C° (77 F)
+/- 0,35% Full Temperature Range
Linearity (0 to 60 degrees C) +/- 2 μA
Common Mode Rejection ?
Input Filter Single pole low pass, -3 dB cutoff @ 15 Hz
Update Time 15 ms for all channels

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External User installed per local and national electrical codes

35010516 09/2020 605


140 SAI 940 00S

Addressing

Overview
The following information describes how the data exchanged between the 140 SAI 940 00S
module and the processor module are mapped.
Except for the health word, the data described here are transferred from the 140 SAI 940 00S
module using the Quantum global backplane communication access mechanism which is common
to all Quantum modules.
NOTE:
13 words are necessary for this module:
 8 words dedicated to channel values, to obtain a full scale value each analog value have to be
mapped on an UINT variable.
 1 word dedicated to errors and warnings
 3 words used by the module (module status, exchange number, CRC)
 1 health word (this word is accessible by the processor module only)

Flat Addressing
The following diagram shows the register of words 1 to 8. On word 1, you read the analog value
sampled by channel 1, and so on.

606 35010516 09/2020


140 SAI 940 00S

The following diagram shows the register of word 9. If bit 15 is set to 1, it means that channel 1 is
out of range. If bit 7 is set to 1, it means that channel 1 is invalid. See the following diagram for the
other channels.

Bit 15 to bit 8: These 8 bits are set to 1 if the input current of the corresponding channel is out its functional
limits (under 3.75 mA or over 20.25 mA).
Bit 7 to bit 0: These 8 bits are set to 1 if internal diagnostics detects an invalid channel inside the module.

Words 10, 11 and 12 are used by the module for internal checking.
 module status: reserved for future use
 Exchange number: serial number of the set of data
 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC): function used to detect errors after transmission

35010516 09/2020 607


140 SAI 940 00S

Health Word
The health word is an extra system control generated by the processor module, using the data read
from the input module.
Any of these errors activates the health word:
 invalid channel (activates only the corresponding bit of the health word)
 out of range current on channel (activates only the corresponding bit)
 CRC
 incorrect exchange number

If an unhealthy input is detected (if a bit on word 13 is set to 0), the value of the corresponding
channel is set to 0 (word 1 to 8) except in case of out of range (the out-of-range value is not set to
zero).
The following diagram shows the register of word 13.

Bit 15 to bit 8: Those bits are not used in word 13.


Bit 7 to bit 0: These 8 bits are set to 1 when no error is detected.

608 35010516 09/2020


140 SAI 940 00S

Topological Addressing
Topological addresses for the 140 SAI 940 00S Input Module.

Point I/O Object Comment


Input 1 %IWr.m.1 Analog value
%Ir.m.1.1 Invalid channel
%Ir.m.1.2 Out of range or broken wire
%Ir.m.1.3 Health bit
•••
Input 8 %IWr.m.8 Analog value
%Ir.m.8.1 Invalid channel
%Ir.m.8.2 Out of range or broken wire
%Ir.m.8.3 Health bit
Module Status and %IWr.m.9.2 (internal use)
Exchange number
CRC LSW %IWr.m.9.3 Less significant word of 32-bit CRC
(internal use)
CRC MSW %IWr.m.9.4 Most significant word of 32-bit CRC
(internal use)
Health word %IWr.m.9.5

Used abbreviations: r = rack, m = module slot.

35010516 09/2020 609


140 SAI 940 00S

Parameter Configuration

Modes of Operation
The 140 SAI 940 00S module is configurable.
The configuration includes:
 Maximum consecutive CRC errors before declaring the module unhealthy.

Parameter and Default Values


Parameter Configuration Window.

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping WORD (%IW-3x) - -
Input Starting Address 1 - Depends on the number of
modules
Input Ending Address 13 -
Task MAST - -
Max Consecutive CRC 1 - Define the number of
Error communication errors necessary
to declare the module unhealthy.

610 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 SDI 953 00S
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 59
140 SDI 953 00S: Digital IN Module

140 SDI 953 00S: Digital IN Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 SDI 953 00S module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 612
Indicators 613
Wiring Diagram 614
Specifications 617
Addressing 619
Parameter Configuration 622

35010516 09/2020 611


140 SDI 953 00S

Presentation

Function
140 SDI 953 00S is a 24VDC 16-channel digital input module.
NOTE: If an error is detected during power-up self tests, the module is unable to start any
communication with the host until the error disappears. If the 24V external power supply is not
connected to the module, an error is detected on the channels and the module will not start.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 SDI 953 00S module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Field Wiring Terminal Block (not provided with the module)
4 Removable Door (not provided with the module)
5 Red Customer Identification Label (Fold label provided with the module and place it inside the door)

NOTE: The housing of safety modules is red and a red customer identification label is provided
with Quantum Safety I/O modules. It shall be placed on the terminal block.

612 35010516 09/2020


140 SDI 953 00S

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 SDI 953 00S module.

Description
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 SDI 953 00S module.

Type of LED LED Id Color State Meaning


System State LED R Green ON Power ON
OFF Power OFF
Active Green ON The module is communicating with the host.
OFF The module is not communicating with the host.
F Red ON An internal diagnostic error is detected.
OFF No internal diagnostic error is detected.
Channel LED 1 .. 16 Green ON The channel is ON.
OFF The channel is OFF.
Red ON Inoperative channel or broken wire detected.
OFF Operative channel and wire.

35010516 09/2020 613


140 SDI 953 00S

Wiring Diagram

Precautions
It is recommended to use a process power supply which does not recover automatically after a
disjunction. Use for instance 24VDC 10A ABL8 RPS24100 in manual mode.

CAUTION
OVERCURRENT TO THE INPUTS
Use fast acting fuses to protect the electronic components of the module from overcurrent.
Improper fuse selection could result to damage to the module.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

614 35010516 09/2020


140 SDI 953 00S

Illustration
The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 SDI 953 00S module.

power supply: 24 VDC


fuse: 1 A fast blow fuse
pull-up resistor (in sensor example): 15 kOhms

35010516 09/2020 615


140 SDI 953 00S

NOTE: There is only one group of 16 inputs. All common 24 V are internally connected and all
common 0 V are also internally connected. The two pins of a same input (e. g: pin 1 and 2 for input
1) are internally connected too so that you can use either the right pin or the left one.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Understanding and Using Cut Wire Detection


If the electrical current between the input and the sensor is more than 1 mA, the wire is detected
as not cut. If this current is less than 1 mA, the wire is detected as broken and the corresponding
input’s red LED is lit.
If you install dry contact sensors, the corresponding input’s red LED will be lit whenever the contact
is open and the current will be at 0 mA. To solve this and use cut wire detection properly, Schneider
Electric recommends installing a pull-up resistor on the sensors so that the minimum current of
1 mA will be reached. You can use a 15 kohms pull-up resistor or work out the value you need.
See the sensor example in the illustration above.

616 35010516 09/2020


140 SDI 953 00S

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 16 IN (1 group x 16 points)


Logic True High
External Power 24 VDC (19.2 .. 30 VDC)
Power Dissipation 2.75 W + 0.25 W x the number of ON points
Bus Current Required 550 mA
I/O map 7 input words
Fault Detection  broken wire (below 1mA)
 internal invalid channel diagnostic
 system inoperative

Update Time 15 ms for all channels

Isolation
Isolation

Group to Group N/A


Group to Bus 1 500 VAC rms for 1 minute

Input Rating
Input Rating

ON Level voltage +11 ... +30 VDC


OFF Level voltage -3 ... +5 VDC
ON Level current 3.0 mA (min.)
OFF Level current 1.5 mA (max.)
Internal input impedance 3.675 kohms
Input Protection By internal rectifier

Absolute Maximum Inputs


Absolute Maximum Inputs

Continuous 30 VDC

35010516 09/2020 617


140 SDI 953 00S

Response
Response

OFF - ON 25 ms (max.)
ON - OFF 25 ms (max.)

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External 1 A fast blow fuse mandatory

CAUTION
OVERCURRENT TO THE INPUTS
Use fast acting fuses to protect the electronic components of the module from overcurrent.
Improper fuse selection could result to damage to the module.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

618 35010516 09/2020


140 SDI 953 00S

Addressing

Overview
The following information describes how the data exchanged between the 140 SDI 953 00S
module and the processor module are mapped.
Except for the health word, the data described here are transferred from the 140 SDI 953 00S
module using the Quantum global backplane communication access mechanism which is common
to all Quantum modules.
NOTE:
7 words are necessary for this module:
 1 word dedicated to channel values
 1 word dedicated to wiring problems
 1 word dedicated to channel state (valid/invalid channel)
 1 word dedicated to power supply status (and exchange number which is used by the module)
 2 words used by the module (CRC)
 1 health word (this word is accessible by the processor module only)

Flat Addressing
The following diagram shows the register of word 1. On bit 15, you read the input value of channel
1, on bit 14, you read the input value of channel 2, and so on.

35010516 09/2020 619


140 SDI 953 00S

The following diagram shows the register of word 2. Bit 15 is set to 1 if no leakage current is
detected on the sensor of channel 1, bit 14 for channel 2, and so on.

The following diagram shows the register of word 3. If bit 15 is set to 1, it means that channel 1 has
detected an invalid channel, bit 14 is for channel 2, and so on.

On word 4, bit 15 is dedicated to the Process Power supply status. It is set to 1 if the external power
supply is no longer detected.

620 35010516 09/2020


140 SDI 953 00S

The other bits on word 4 and words 5 and 6 are used by the module for internal checking:
 Exchange number: serial number of the set of data
 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC): function used to detect errors after transmission

Health Word
The health word is an extra system control generated by the processor module, using the data read
from the input module.
Any of these errors activates the health word:
 broken wire (activates only the corresponding bit of the health word)
 invalid channel (activates only the corresponding bit of the health word)
 process power supply not detected
 CRC error
 incorrect exchange number

If an unhealthy input is detected (if a bit on word 7 is set to 0), the value of the corresponding
channel is set to 0 (on word 1).
The following diagram shows the register of word 7.

Bit 15 to bit 0: These 16 bits are set to 1 when no error is detected.

35010516 09/2020 621


140 SDI 953 00S

Parameter Configuration

Modes of Operation
The 140 SDI 953 00S module is configurable.
The configuration includes:
 Drop and Slot number (automatically filled by Control Expert)
 Maximum consecutive CRC errors before declaring the module unhealthy

If an unhealthy input is detected (i.e. a bit on word 7 is set to 0), the value of the corresponding
channel is set to 0 on word 1.
The module provides process side diagnostics helping the customer to debug the process interface
during setup (process power supply detection and open circuit detection).

Parameter and Default Values


Parameter Configuration Window.

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping WORD (%IW-3x) - -
Input Starting Address 1 - Depends on the number of
modules
Input Ending Address 7 -
Input Type BINARY - -
Task MAST - -
Max Consecutive CRC 1 - Define the number of
Error communication errors
necessary to declare the
module unhealthy.

622 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
140 SDO 953 00S
35010516 09/2020

Chapter 60
140 SDO 953 00S: Digital OUT Module

140 SDO 953 00S: Digital OUT Module

About this Chapter


The following chapter provides information on the Quantum 140 SDO 953 00S module.

What Is in This Chapter?


This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation 624
Indicators 625
Wiring Diagram 626
Specifications 629
Addressing 632
Parameter Configuration 638

35010516 09/2020 623


140 SDO 953 00S

Presentation

Function
24 VDC 0,5 A Source overload detection 16-channel Digital Output module.
NOTE: If an error is detected during power-up self tests, the module is unable to start any
communication with the host until the error disappears. If the 24 V external power supply is not
connected to the module, an error is detected on the channels and the module will not start.

Illustration
The following figure shows the 140 SDO 953 00S module and its components.

1 Model Number, Module Description, Color Code


2 LED Display
3 Field Wiring Terminal Block (not provided with the module)
4 Removable Door (not provided with the module)
5 Red Customer Identification Label (Fold label provided with the module and place it inside the door)

NOTE: The housing of safety modules is red and a red customer identification label is provided
with Quantum Safety I/O modules. It shall be placed on the terminal block.

624 35010516 09/2020


140 SDO 953 00S

Indicators

Illustration
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 SDO 953 00S module.

Description
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 SDO 953 00S module.

Type of LED Id Color State Meaning


LED
System R Green ON Power ON
State LED OFF Power OFF
Active Green ON The module is communicating with the host.
OFF The module is not communicating with the host.
F Red ON An internal diagnostic error is detected and/or the module is in
fallback state
OFF No internal diagnostic error is detected and the module is not in
fallback state
Channel 1 .. 16 Green ON The channel is ON.
LED
OFF The channel is OFF.
Red ON Inoperable channel and/or overload detected on the channel.
OFF Channel operative.

35010516 09/2020 625


140 SDO 953 00S

Wiring Diagram

Precautions
It is mandatory to use a process power supply which does not recover automatically after a
disjunction. Use for instance 24 VDC 10 A ABL8 RPS24100 in manual mode.

CAUTION
OVERCURRENT TO THE OUTPUTS
Use fast acting fuses to protect the electronic components of the module from overcurrent.
Improper fuse selection could result to damage to the module.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

626 35010516 09/2020


140 SDO 953 00S

Illustration
The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 SDO 953 00S module.

power supply: 24 VDC


fuse: 10 A max (determined by the module load current), fast blow
pre-act: pre-actuator

35010516 09/2020 627


140 SDO 953 00S

NOTE: There is only one group of 16 outputs. All common 24 V are internally connected and all
common 0V are also internally connected. For safety applications, it is recommended to connect
at least 2 ground lines (common 0V) to the field wiring terminal block. The two pins of a same input
(e. g: pin 1 and 2 for input 1) are internally connected too so that you can use either the right pin
or the left one.
NOTE: The tightening torque must be between 0.5 Nm and 0.8 Nm.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION OF ADAPTER
 Before tightening the locknut to the torque 0.50...0.80 Nm, be sure to properly position the
right-angle F adapter connector.
 During tightening, be sure to maintain the connector securely.
 Do not tighten the right-angle F adapter beyond the specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

628 35010516 09/2020


140 SDO 953 00S

Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications

Module Type 16 OUT (1 group x 16 channels)


Logic True High
Pre-actuator Power Supply 24 VDC
Power Dissipation 1.9 W + 0.65 V x I2
Bus Current required (Module) 350 mA
I/O map 4 output words and 7 input words
Fault Detection  overload
 24 V process supply problem
 system inoperable

Update Time 15 ms for all channels

Voltage
Voltage

Operating Voltage (max.) 19.2 ... 30 VDC


Absolute Voltage (max.) 34 VDC
ON State Drop / Point 0.3 VDC @ 0.5 A

Maximum Load Current / Surge Current


Maximum Load Current / Surge Current

Each Point 0.65 A


Per Module 10.4 A
Surge Current (max.) 2 A @ 10 ms once (internal current limitation)
OFF State Leakage / Point 0.5 mA @ 30 VDC

35010516 09/2020 629


140 SDO 953 00S

Isolation / Protection
Isolation / Protection

Group to Group N/A


Group to Bus 1500 VAC rms for 1 minute
Output Protection  transient voltage suppression (internal)
 overload
 disjunction (0.7 A @ 10 ms)
 current limitation (2 A)

Response (Resistive Loads)


Response (Resistive Loads)

OFF - ON 20 ms (max.)
ON - OFF 20 ms (max.)

Load Inductance / Capacitance (max.)


Load Inductance / Capacitance (max.)

Load Inductance (max.) 0.5 Henry @ 11 Hz switch frequency, or:

Load Capacitance (max.) 50 μF

630 35010516 09/2020


140 SDO 953 00S

Fuses
Fuses

Internal None
External Mandatory
(fast blow, max 10 A, determined by the module
load current)

CAUTION
OVERCURRENT TO THE OUPUTS
Use fast acting fuses to protect the electronic components of the module from overcurrent.
Improper fuse selection could result to damage to the module.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

35010516 09/2020 631


140 SDO 953 00S

Addressing

Overview
The following information describes how the data exchanged between the 140 SDO 953 00S
module and the processor module are mapped.
Except for the health word, the data described here are transferred to and from the
140 SDO 953 00S module using the Quantum global backplane communication access
mechanism which is common to all Quantum modules.
NOTE: The words "input" and "output" used here are defined with respect to the processor module.
11 words are necessary for this module:
 4 words dedicated to output data
 1 dedicated to channel values
 3 words used by the module (exchange number, CRC)

 6 words dedicated to inputs data:


 1 dedicated to energized/de-energized channel detection
 1 dedicated to overload errors
 1 dedicated to unsafe channel errors
 1 dedicated to process power supply status, malfunction from the host (and exchange
number which is used by the module)
 2 words used by the module (CRC)

 1 health word (this word is accessible by the processor module only)

632 35010516 09/2020


140 SDO 953 00S

Flat Addressing (Output words)


The following diagram shows the register of the first output word. On bit 15, you read the output
value of channel 1, on bit 14, you read the output value of channel 2, and so on.

Words 2, 3 and 4 are used by the module for internal checking:


 Exchange number: serial number of the set of data
 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC): function used to detect errors after transmission

35010516 09/2020 633


140 SDO 953 00S

Flat Addressing (Input words)


The following diagram shows the register of the first input word. If bit 15 is set to 1, it means that
the output is energized on channel 1. If bit 14 is set to 1, it means that the output is energized on
channel 2, and so on.

634 35010516 09/2020


140 SDO 953 00S

The following diagram shows the register of the second input word. Bit 15 set to 1 means that there
is an overload problem on channel 1, bit 14 set to 1 means that there is an overload problem on
channel 2, and so on.

NOTE: In case of activation of the overload bit, the corresponding output is automatically switched
to the OFF state by the module (disjunction) and maintained OFF during at least 10 seconds. To
recover the control of the output, it is necessary to set by application the overloaded output
command of the module to the OFF state.

35010516 09/2020 635


140 SDO 953 00S

The following diagram shows the register of the third input word. If bit 15 is set to 1, it means that
f the internal checks have detected a malfunction of channel 1, etc.

On word 4, bit 15 is dedicated to the Process Power supply Error. It is set to 1 if the external power
supply is no longer detected.
On word 4, bit 14 is dedicated to the System Shut Down. It is set to 1 if the module has detected
a malfunction from its host. In that case, the module is safe and shuts down.
The other bits on word 4 and words 5 and 6 are used by the module for internal checking:
 Exchange number: serial number of the set of data
 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC): function used to detect errors after transmission

636 35010516 09/2020


140 SDO 953 00S

Health Word
The health word is an extra system control generated by the processor module, using the data read
from the output module.
Any of these errors activates the health word:
 overload problem (activates only the corresponding bit of the health word)
 unsafe channel (activates only the corresponding bit of the health word)
 malfunction of the host (SSD)
 process power supply problem
 CRC error
 incorrect exchange number

The following diagram shows the register of word 7.

Bit 15 to bit 0: These 16 bits are set to 1 when no error is detected.

35010516 09/2020 637


140 SDO 953 00S

Parameter Configuration

Modes of Operation
The configuration of the 140 SDO 953 00S includes:
 Drop and Slot number (automatically filled by Control Expert)
 Maximum consecutive CRC errors before declaring the module unhealthy
 Timeout before modules goes to fallback state
 Fallback state (user defined or hold last value)

NOTE: The module only uses the word interface (%QW-4x). Although the module is a digital
output, it cannot be configured to use the bit interface (%Q-0x).
During normal operation, the 140 SDO 953 00S module cyclically tests its internal process side
electronics so that the module detects the status of the output channels. It also runs a set of
diagnostic tests on its internal system and on its internal process side electronics.

Output Fallback State Configuration


In case the 140 SDO 953 00S module detects a discrepancy in the data from the host, the module
sets its outputs to configured fall back state.
The outputs of the 140 SDO 953 00S module have three states.
 energized
 de-energized
 "maintain last state" (fall back state)

In the parameter configuration screen of the Control Expert, you can configure the output position
in case the module is no more serviced by the processor module. You can either maintain last
value or define another value.

638 35010516 09/2020


140 SDO 953 00S

Parameter and Default Values


Parameter Configuration Window.

Name Default Value Options Description


Mapping WORD (%IW-3x %MW-4x) - -
Input Starting Address 1 - Depends on the number of modules
Input Ending Address 7 -
Output Starting Address 1 - Depends on the number of modules
Output Ending Address 4 -
Task MAST - -
Output Type BINARY - -
Max Consecutive CRC 1 - Define the number of communication
Error errors necessary to declare the module
unhealthy.

35010516 09/2020 639


140 SDO 953 00S

Name Default Value Options Description


Module TimeOut 200 ms - Define how long the outputs last before
going to their fallback position in case no
communication from the processor
module is detected.
Time Out State
Channel 1 HOLD LAST VALUE USER DEFINED Position in case of time out
...
Channel 16 HOLD LAST VALUE USER DEFINED Position in case of time out

640 35010516 09/2020


Quantum using EcoStruxure™ Control Expert
Index
35010516 09/2020

Index

0-9 140DDO36400, 363


140DDO84300, 373
140ACI03000, 61
140DDO88500, 383
140ACI04000, 73
140DII33000, 571
140ACO02000, 125
140DIO33000, 581
140ACO13000, 135
140DRA84000, 447
140AII33000, 525
140DRC83000, 455
140AII33010, 547
140DSI35300, 309
140AIO33000, 559
140DVO85300, 465
140AMM09000, 157
140SAI94000S, 597
140ARI03010, 83
140SDI95300S, 611
140ATI03000, 97
140SDO95300S, 623
140AVI03000, 111
140AVO02000, 145
140DAI34000, 237
140DAI35300, 245
A
addressing, 27
140DAI44000, 253
flat, 28
140DAI45300, 261
IODDT, 30
140DAI54000, 269
140DAI54300, 277
140DAI55300, 285
140DAI74000, 293
C
140DAI75300, 301 channel data structure for analog modules
140DAM59000, 505 T_ANA_BI_VWE, 30, 32
140DAO84000, 395 T_ANA_IN_VE, 30, 31
140DAO84010, 405 T_ANA_IN_VWE, 30, 31
140DAO84210, 415 T_CNT_105, 30
140DAO84220, 427 configuring discrete I/O modules, 23
140DAO85300, 437
140DDI15310, 177
140DDI35300, 185
I
140DDI35310, 193 Intrisically Safe, 519
140DDI36400, 201
140DDI67300, 211
140DDI84100, 221 Q
140DDI85300, 229 Quantum Safety I/O, 594
140DDM39000, 481
140DDM69000, 493
140DDO15310, 323 R
140DDO35300, 333 remote I/O (RIO), 594
140DDO35301, 343 RIO (remote I/O), 594
140DDO35310, 353

35010516 09/2020 641


Index

S
status bytes, 35, 39, 45, 52, 70, 81, 94, 108,
121, 132, 142, 153, 170, 317, 474, 542, 557,
568
status words, 69, 80, 92, 106, 120, 132, 142,
153, 168, 316, 473, 540, 556, 568, 606, 619,
632

T
T_ANA_BI_VWE, 32
T_ANA_IN_VE, 31
T_ANA_IN_VWE, 31
T_CNT_105, 32
terminal blocks
installing, 57

642 35010516 09/2020

You might also like